f^MMMBfiiMmniiiniiMinnimiiMHiiiiiiiiMiiKiMiiiiiiiiinniinM 


n—IIJIIIIIIIIIHIII"''"'"'"'"'    "I ■■■■»lill>ll»IIIIIMM<MtMMMtllil»lillllHllMlilliyMI<'l«>WIIWI><lMW<l»1«lMW1Mlni1«MMMM»^ 


1 

■ 

1 

fi 

30 

IT  I 
iASED  on   C/ES 


GE 


<  iiWlllWWHBWiiiwaigHiii roi«iiiiiwiiii<i»»B««it»»BMi»wiiHniiiiw>iiwjrj««wwiiwiiii«wiwii«nranM«<in<wwMnnimK<M>^^ 


•  "L  Lioi   rn 


♦  "Ttm 


'^:. 


LIBRARY 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIEORNIA 

SANTA  BARBARA 


PRESENTED  BY 

ARTHUR   PARK  TRACY 


cfTrB.  ^ 


LATIN  COMPOSITION 

FOR 

SECONDARY  SCHOOLS 

BY 

BENJAMIN    L.   D'OOGE,  Ph.D. 

Professor  in  the  Michigan  State  Normal  College 


Part  I 
BASED    ON  C^SAR 


GINN   &   COMPANY 

BOSTON  •  NEW  YORK  •  CHICAGO  •  LONDON 


Copyright,  1904 
By  benjamin    L.  D'OOGE 


ALL   RIGHTS   RESERVED 
5"3-3 


tCbc    3tf)tnaum    Xivtgg 

GINN   &   COMPANY  •  PRO- 
PRIETORS •  BOSTON  ■  U.S.A. 


LIBRARY 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA 

SANTA  BARBARA 


PREFACE 

The  purpose  of  the  study  of  Latin  Composition  is  genen 
ally  conceded  to  be,  not  to  teach  the  art  of  writing  Latin  as 
an  end  in  itself,  but  rather  to  increase  the  student's  famil- 
iarity with  the  style,  idioms,  and  vocabulary  of  the  authors 
he  is  reading,  and  at  the  same  time  to  afford  effective  instruc- 
tion in  syntax.  It  is  for  the  accomplishment  of  this  twofold 
purpose  that  the  following  three  years'  course  has  been  pre- 
pared. The  course  is  divided  into  three  parts,  designed 
respectively  for  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  years  of  the 
secondary  school,  and  is  of  the  following  character:  — 

Part  I  is  based  on  Caesar's  Gallic  War  for  vocabulary, 
idioms,  and  general  content ;  but  in  syntax  the  exercises 
are  made  to  conform  to  the  systematic  presentation  of  the 
subject  which  characterizes  the  lessons  throughout.  To 
take  up  constructions  in  Latin  composition  in  the  capricious 
order  in  which  they  happen  to  occur  in  the  accompanying 
text  has  been  shown  to  be  pedagogically  unsound  and  fatally 
weak  in  that  the  subjects  are  not  presented  in  their  proper 
order  or  logical  course  of  development,  and  the  student  is 
unable  to  bring  the  disorganized  bits  of  knowledge  thus  ac- 
quired into  a  strong  and  well-organized  synthetic  whole.  The 
constructions  have,  therefore,  been  taken  up  in  their  grammat- 
ical sequence,  and  the  exercises  are  preceded  by  appropriate 
grammar-lessons ;  next  follow  selected  idioms  to  be  memo- 
rized, and  finally  the  sentences  aim  to  give  practical  and  illu- 
minating expression  to  the  syntax  and  idioms  that  precede. 


IV  rRKFACK 

It  is  the  general  experience  of  teachers  that  young  pupils 
fail  to  understand  much  that  the  grammar  contains,  and  ll)at 
they  also  fail  to  discriminate  between  the  important  and  un- 
important. Considerable  matter  of  an  explanatory  character 
has  therefore  been  added  to  the  grammatical  references. 
This  acts  as  a  medium  between  the  student  and  the  grammar  : 
interprets  what  is  obscure  or  technical  in  statement,  throws 
into  strong  relief  what  is  essential  and  of  vital  importance, 
and  presents  in  brief  summaries,  practical  and  convenient 
for  memorizing,  the  most  important  constructions. 

The  exercises  for  oral  translation  are  very  simple  and  have 
been  made  so  easy  as  not  to  demand  a  large  amount  of  time 
in  preparation.  They  can  be  used  most  easily  and  profit- 
ably in  connection  with  each  day's  review  lesson.  Each 
fourth  exercise  is  in  connected  narrative  prose  and  designed 
for  written  translation.  The  written  exercises  are  without 
new  grammar  work,  and  aim  to  review  especially  the  syntac- 
tical principles  treated  in  the  three  preceding  oral  exercises 
and  to  give  practice  in  writing  connected  Latin.  In  both 
oral  and  written  exercises  the  most  space  has  been  given  to 
the  constructions  that  are  the  most  important.  A  few  les- 
sons involving  some  of  the  more  difficult  or  more  unusual 
constructions  have  been  marked  with  an  asterisk  and  may 
be  omitted  at  the  discretion  of  the  teacher.  Reviews  of 
both  idioms  and  grammar  are  provided  for  at  convenient 
intervals. 

.Schools  differ  so  greatly  in  the  amount  of  time  given  to 
Latin  composition  that  it  is  impossible  to  make  a  manual  of  a 
size  that  will  suit  all  conditions.  Many  schools  will  find  it  pos- 
sible to  finish  all  of  Part  I.  For  such  as  do  not  take  it  all,  it 
would  be  well  to  go  at  least  as  far  as  "The  Syntax  of  Nouns," 
Lesson  LXXXVIL  This  subject  is  taken  up  more  fully  in 
Part  II  and  may  be  deferred  until  that  time. 


PREFACE  V 

Part  II  is  based  on  Cicero's  Orations  and  follows  in  gen- 
eral the  plan  of  Part  I  ;  systematic  work  in  grammar  being 
carried  on  with  illustrative  exercises  throughout  the  year. 
The  orations  used  for  a  basis  are  the  Manilian  Law,  the 
Catilinarian  Orations,  and  the  Archias.  The  ground  covered 
is  in  some  respects  the  same  as  that  gone  over  in  Part  I,  except 
that  the  treatment  is  more  detailed  and  the  accompanying 
exercises  are  somewhat  harder.  Among  the  new  subjects 
discussed  in  Part  II  are  the  translation  in  Latin  of  the  Eng- 
lish auxiliary  verbs  and  the  use  and  meaning  of  the  Latin 
prepositions.  Both  of  these  classes  of  words  are  of  constant 
occurrence,  and  thus  far  have  lacked  adequate  treatment  in 
books  for  secondary  schools.  To  give  greater  definiteness  to 
the  work  it  seemed  wise  to  discuss  particular  subjects  with 
special  orations,  as  follows  :  with  the  Manilian  Law,  syntax 
of  nouns,  adjectives,  and  pronouns ;  with  the  Catilinarian 
Orations,  syntax  of  the  subjunctive;  with  the  Archias,  the 
English  auxiliary  verbs  and  the  Latin  prepositions.  There 
has  been  provided,  further,  a  vocabulary  of  synonyms,  without 
which  a  study  of  Cicero's  prose  would  be  quite  incomplete. 

Part  III  consists  of  thirty-four  exercises  to  be  used  as  a 
prose  review  in  the  fourth  year.  If  systematic  study  of 
grammar  has  been  steadily  pursued  for  two  years,  such 
knowledge  can  be  best  tested  and  made  effective  by  miscel- 
laneous exercises  independent  of  an  accompanying  text; 
These  exercises  are  of  this  character,  and  consist  each  of 
two  parts,  A  and  B.  The  sentences  in  A  are  short  and  dis- 
connected, while  B  consists  of  a  paragraph  of  connected 
narrative.  Teachers  will  use  either  or  both  parts  at  their 
discretion.  One  of  these  exercises  per  week  throughout  the 
senior  year  would  not  seem  an  excessive  requirement.  In 
order  that  the  exercises  might  be  well  within  the  powers  of 
students,  they  were  based  on  Cicero's  Orations  and  Letters, 


Vi  I'KKKACE 

such  portions  being  chosen  as  arc  not  usually  read  in  second- 
ary schools.  The  vocabulary,  therefore,  and  many  of  the 
idioms  and  phrases,  will  not  be  unfamiliar ;  and  students 
should  be  encouraged  to  write  these  exercises  as  far  as  pos- 
sible without  consulting  the  special  English-Latin  vocabulary 
with  which  this  part  has  been  provided. 

In  the  preparation  of  this  book  I  have  had  the  criticism 
and  advice  of  many  prominent  teachers  of  secondary  Latin, 
and  I  take  pleasure  in  acknowledging  their  valuable  services. 
Especial  mention  is  due  to  Miss  Bessie  J.  Snyder,  of  the 
High  School  of  Omaha,  Neb.,  and  to  Miss  Clara  Allison,  of 
the  High  School  of  Hastings,  Mich. 

BENJAMIN   L.  D'OOGE. 

Michigan  State  Normal  College. 
November  i,  190./^, 


PART  I 

BASED  ON  CESAR'S  GALLIC  WAR 
BOOKS  I-IV 


CONTENTS 


I.    RULES  FOR  WORD-ORDER  AND  SENTENCE- 
STRUCTURE 
Lbsson  Page 

1.  Word-Order:  General  Principles i 

2.  Word-Order :   Special  Rules 2 

3.  Arrangement  of  Clauses 4 

4.  Written  Translation 6 

n.    RULES  FOR  AGREEMENT 

5.  The  General  Forms  of  Agreement .  7 

Noun  in  Apposition  or  as  Predicate .  7 

6.  Adjective  with  its  Noun .8 

7.  Adjective  Agreement  (continued^ .  9 

8.  Written  Translation 10 

9.  Relative  with  its  Antecedent 11 

10.  Verb  with  its  Subject 12 

11.  Verb  with  Two  or  More  Subjects 13 

12.  Review  and  Written  Translation 13 

in.    THE  INDICATIVE  MOOD 

13.  Tenses  of  the  Indicative  :  General  Rules 14 

The  Present  Indicative 14 

14.  The  Imperfect  Indicative 15 

15.  The  Perfect  Indicative 17 

16.  Written  Translation 18 

17.  The  Future,  Future  Perfect,  and  Pluperfect  Indicative     ...  18 

IV.     THE   SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD  IN  INDEPENDENT 
SENTENCES 

18.  The  Subjunctive  in  General 19 

The  Hortatory  or  Volitive  Subjunctive 19 

19.  The  Optative  Subjunctive 21 

20.  Written  Translation 22 

21.  The  Subjunctive  in  Rhetorical  or  Deliberative  Questions      .     .  23 

22.  The  Potential  Subjunctive 24 


CONTENTS 


Lhj^on  V-     T^  IMPERATIVE  MOOD  p^cB 

23.  The  Imperative  Mood — Prohibitions 25 

24.  Review  ami  Written  Translation 26 

VI.  MOODS  AND  TENSES  IN  DEPENDENT  AND 
SUBSTANTIVE  CLAUSES 

25.  Sequence  of  Tenses 27 

26.  Peculiarities  in  Tense-Sequence 29 

27.  Pure  and  Relative  Clauses  of  Purpose 30 

28.  Written  Translation 32 

29.  Substantive  Clauses 32 

Substantive  Clauses  of  Purpose 32 

30.  Clauses  of  Purpose  (continued) 34 

31.  The  Various  Ways  of  Expressing  Purpose 34 

32.  Review  and  Written  Translation 36 

33.  Clauses  of  Characteristic 37 

34.  Relative  Clauses  after  dignus,  indignus,  etc 38 

35.  Pure  and  Relative  Clauses  of  Result 39 

36.  Written  Translation 41 

37.  Substantive  Clauses  of  Result 41 

38.  Clauses  introduced  by  quin  and  quominus 43 

39.  General  Review  of  Purpose  and  Result 44 

40.  Review  of  Idioms  and  Written  Translation 45 

41.  Causal  Clauses  introduced  by  quod,  quia,  quoniam,  and  quando  .  46 

42.  Causal  Clauses  introduced  by  cum  and  qui 47 

43.  Temporal  Clauses  introduced  by  postquam,  ut,  ubi,  simul  ac,  ut 

primum,  etc 48 

44.  Written  Translation 49 

45.  Temporal  Clauses  introduced  by  cum 50 

46.  Temporal  Clauses  introduced  by  antequam  and  priusquam    .     .  51 

47.  Temporal  Clauses  introduced  by  dum,  donee,  and  quoad    ...  52 

48.  Written  Translation 53 

49.-  Substantive  Clauses  introduced  by  quod 54 

50.  Direct  Questions 55 

51.  Indirect  Questions 56 

52.  Review  and  Written  Translation 57 

53.  Conditional  Sentences,  General  Statements 58 

Conditional  Sentences  with  the  Indicative 58 

54.  Conditional  Sentences  with  the  Present  or  Perfect  Subjunctive  61 

55.  Conditional  Sentences  with  the  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  Sub- 

junctive      61 

56.  Written  Translation 62 

57.  Conditions  in  which  the  Protasis  denotes  Repeated  Action  .     .  63 
Conditions  Contrary  to  Fact  with  the  Indicative  in  the  Apodosis  63 

58.  Conditional  Clauses  of  Comparison  with  ac  si,  ut  si,  quasi,  etc.  64 

59.  Concessive  Clauses 66 


CONTENTS  xi 


Lesson  Page 

60.  Review  and  Written  Translation 67 

61.  Clauses  with  dum,  modo,  dum  modo,  denoting  a  Wish  or  a  Pro- 

viso       68 


VII.     MOODS   IN   INDIRECT  DISCOURSE 

62.  Declaratory  Sentences  in  Indirect  Discourse 69 

63.  Interrogative  Sentences  in  Indirect  Discourse 71 

Commands  in  Indirect  Discourse 71 

64.  Written  Translation 73 

65.  Conditional  Sentences  with  the  Indicative,  or  of  the  First  Class, 

in  Indirect  Discourse 74 

66.  Conditional  Sentences  with  the  Present  or  Perfect  Subjunctive, 

or  of  the  Second  Class,  in  Indirect  Discourse 75 

67.  Conditional   Sentences  with  the  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  Sub- 

junctive, or  of  the  Third  Class,  in  Indirect  Discourse     .     .  76 

68.  Written  Translation 77 

69.  Passive  Apodoses  in  Indirect  Discourse 78 

70.  Implied  or  Informal  Indirect  Discourse 79 

71.  Subjunctive  of  Integral  Part  or  Attraction 81 

72.  Review  and  Written  Translation 82 


Vm.    NOUN  AND  ADJECTIVE  FORMS  OF  THE  VERB 

73.  Tenses  of  the  Infinitive 83 

The  Infinitive  as  Subject  or  Predicate 83 

74.  The  Infinitive  as  Object 85 

75.  The  Complementary  Infinitive 86 

The  Historical  Infinitive 86 

76.  W^ritten  Translation 87 

77.  The  Participle:   Tenses;   Adjective  and  Predicate   Uses;  the 

Ablative  Absolute 88 

78.  The  Future  Passive  Participle:  denoting  Purpose;  the  Second 

Periphrastic  Conjugation  ;  the  Dative  of  Agent    ....  90 

79.  The  Gerund  and  Gerundive:  General  Rules;  the  Genitive,  the 

Dative 91 

80.  Written  Translation 93 

81.  The  Gerund  and  Gerundive :  the  Accusative,  the  Ablative  .     .  93 

82.  The  Supine  in  -um  and  -u 94 

IX.     SYNTAX   OF   PRONOUNS 

83.  Personal,  Possessive,  and  Reflexive  Pronouns 95 

84.  Written  Translation 96 

85.  Relative,  Interrogative,  and  Indefinite  Pronouns 97 

86.  Demonstrative  Pronouns 98 

alius  and  alter 98 


Xii  CONTENTS 


LsssoN  ^-    SYNTAX  OF  NOUNS  p^^.^ 

87.  Expressions  of  Time 100 

SS.   Review  and  Written  Translation 10 1 

89.  Kxpressions  i)f  Place 102 

90.  The  Genitive  with  Nouns 104 

91.  The  Genitive  in  Apposition  with  a  Possessive  Pronoun;  the 

Predicate  Genitive ;  the  Genitive  with  Adjectives    .     .     .  105 

92.  Written  Translation 106 

93.  The  Genitive  with  Verbs 107 

94.  The  Dative:  General  Rule;    Indirect  Object 108 

95.  The  Dative  with  Special  Intransitive  Verbs,  and  with  Passive 

Intransitives i  lO 

96.  Written  Translation ' iii 

97.  The  Dative  with  Compounds  ;  the  Dative  of  .Separation     .     .112 

98.  The  Dative  of  Possession  ;  the  Dative  of  Purpose  or  End       .  113 

99.  The  Dative  of  Reference ;  the   Dative  with  Adjectives   .     .     .114 

100.  Review  and  Written  Translation       115 

loi.  The  Accusative  Case:    Direct    Object;    Cognate   Accusative; 

Accusative  of  Extent  ...  116 

102.  Two  Accusatives:  Direct  Object  and  Predicate,  Person  and 

Thing 117 

103.  The  Adverbial  Accusative;  Subject  of  an  Infinitive  .     .     .     .118 

104.  Written  Translation 120 

105.  The  Ablative  Case :  General  Consideration ;   the  Ablative  of 

Separation,  of  Source,  Origin,  and  Material;  of  Cause  .  121 
io6.  The  Ablative  of  Agent,  of  Comparison,  of  Manner  .  .  .  .122 
107.  The  Ablative  of  Means;  the  Ablative  with  utor,  fruor,  etc.; 

the  Ablative  with  opus  and  iisus 123 

loS.  Written  Translation 124 

109.  The  Ablative  of  Accompaniment,  of  Degree  of  Difference, 

of  Quality  or  Characteristic 125 

no.  The    Ablative   of    Price,    of   Specification,    with    dignus   and 

indignus 126 

I.NDEX  OF  Grammatical  Notes       129 


LATIN    COMPOSITION 

Part    I 


I.     RULES   FOR  WORD-ORDER  AND   SENTENCE- 
STRUCTURE 

LESSON    I 

1.  1  Word-Order,  General  Principles.  —  §  595-597- «  (343,  344- R- a); 
B.  348,  349;  G.  671-674;  H.  663-670  (559-564);  H-B.  621-623. 

2.  The  words  of  an  English  sentence  stand  in  a  fixed  order 
which  shows  their  grammatical  relation  to  each  other.  In  Latin 
this  relation  is  shown  by  iftfiection,  and  the  order  of  the  words 
represents  their  relative  emphasis  and  importance  in  the  writer's 
or  speaker's  mind. 

3.  The  mo.st  emphatic  place  is  the  first ;  next  in  importance  is 
the  last  J  the  weakest  point  is  the  Diiddle. 

4.  As  the  most  important  word  in  the  sentence  is  the  subject, 
and  the  second  in  importance  is  the  verb,  these  normally  stand  first 
and  last  respectively.  Their  respective  modifiers  stand  next  these 
according  to  their  relative  emphasis.  This  may  be  represented 
as  follows  :  — 

STRONG  WEAK  STRONG 


SUBJECT   FOLLOWED   BY   ITS   MODIFIERS  MODIFIERS  FOLLOWED  BY  VERB 

^  The  Grammars  are  referred  to  as  follows  :  §  (Allen  and  Greenough), 
B.  (Bennett),  G.  (Gildersleeve-I.odge),  H.  (Ilarkness),  H-B.  (Hale  and 
Buck).     The  references  in  parenthesis  are  to  the  old  editions. 


2  LATIN   COMPOSITION 

5.  The  normal  order  of  a  simple  sentence  is — 

Expressions  of 

Time 

,,   ,  .        ,  .      ,,    ,.^        ,  Place     Indirect  ,  Direct  .    .  ,      t   i  tt    u 
Subtect     Its  .Modifiers  .  ,  .  Adverb    Verb. 

^MM  '  -^^^— —  '  Cause  '  Object     '  Object  '  — —  't«M 

Means 

etc. 

But  this  order  is  constantly  varied,  especially  by  the  desire  for 
emphasis  on  some  word  or  phrase. 

6.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

inter  se  difierunt.  they  differ  from  each  other. 

minime  saepe.  very  seldom  {least  often). 

ad  effeminandos  animos.  to  weaken  courage. 

qua  de  causa.  for  this  reason. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  i 

7.  I.  Gaul  as  a  whole  is  divided  into  three  parts.  2.  The 
Belgas,  Aquitani,  and  Celts  inhabit  Gaul.  3.  The  Romans 
call  the  Celts  Gauls.  4.  These  all  differ  from  each  other. 
5.  The  Marne  and  the  Seine  are  rivers.  6.  The  Belga^  are 
the  farthest  away  from  the  province.  7.  The  BelgK  and 
the  Germans  wage  war  continually.  8.  Merchants  very 
seldom  visit  the  Germans.  9.  Merchants  import  articles 
iea)  which  tend  to  weaken  courage. 

LESSON    II 

8.  Word-Order,  Special  Rules.  —  §  598  (344).  a.  i,  2  ;  b,  c,  g,  j,  k\ 
599.  a-/ (345.  a-e) ;  B.  350.  i-io;  G.  675-681  ;  H.  671-680  (565-569) ; 
H-B.  624,  625.  I-III. 

9.  Rhetorical  order :  deviations  from  the  normal  order  described 
in  sec.  6  result  in  the  rhetorical  order.     These  deviations  arise  — 

a.  From  a  desire  to  emphasize  some  word  or  phrase. 


WORD-ORDER  AND    SENTENCE-STRUCTURE      3 

d.  From  a  desire  to  make  clear  the  connection  with  a  preceding 
sentence. 

c.  From  a  desire  for  rhythm  and  euphony. 

10.  Emphasis  is  secured  — 

a.  By  placing  words  to  be  emphasized  yfrj/,  more  rarely  lasi 
(c£.  sec.  3). 

Gallos  ab  Aquitanis  Garumna  flumen  dividit. 

*  T/ie  GAULS  are  sepa7-ated from  the  Aquitanians 

by  the  Garonne  river. 

Magna  dis  immortalibus  habenda  est  gratia. 
GREAT  GRATITUDE  is  due  the  immortal  gods. 

b.  By  separating  words  that  naturally  belong  together. 

Note  the  separation  of  magna  and  gratia  in  the  preceding 
example. 

c.  By  reversing  the  normal  order  (cf.  sec.  5). 

This  applies  especially  to  qualifying  adjectives  and  to  genitives. 
Modifiers  that  usually  follow  their  nouns  are  made  emphatic  by 
being  placed  before  them,  and  vice  versa :  — 
Ille  imperator,  that  general  (normal  order). 
Imperator  ille,  that  famous  ^^«t';-«/ (normal  order  reversed). 
Mors  fratris  tui,  the  death  of  yotir  brother,  but  Tui  fratris 
mors,  YOUR  brother's  death. 

11.  Demonstrative  pronouns,  cardinal  numerals,  adjectives  of 
quantity  and  place  (e.g.  ulterior,  citerior,  inferior,  etc.),  normally 
precede  their  nouns;  other  adjectives,  ordinal  numerals,  posses- 
sives,  indefinites,  and  genitives,  normally  follow  their  nouns. 
(Cf.  grammars.) 

12.  Words  referring  back  to  a  previous  sentence  (cf.  sec.  9.  b) 
are  usually  placed  first. 

Compare  the  English  Ariovisttts  was  king  of  the  Germans. 
Ccesar  sent  ambassadors  to  him  with  the  Latin  Ariovistus  erat 
Germanorum  rex.     Ad  eum  Caesar  legates  misit.     Note  that  in  the 

1  The  voice  is  changed  in  translation  to  approximate  the  emphasis 
of  the  Latin  order. 


4  LATIN    CDMl'OSITION 

second  sentence  Ad  eum  is  placed  fust  because  referring  to  the 
preceding  subject.  Com])are  also  the  order  of  Tlie  bravest  of  all 
these  are  the  Deh^ians  and  tlie  Latin  Horum  omnium  fortissimi 
sunt  Belgae.  This  principle  explains  the  use  and  position  of  such 
c«>nnecting  words  and  piirases  as  quam  ob  rem,  qua  de  causa,  quibus 
rebus  cognitis,  etc. 

13.  enim,  autem,  ver5,  quidem,  quoque,  igitur,  never  stand  first 
(postpositive).    The  vocative  case  rarely  stands  first. 

14.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 
initium  capit  a.  begins  at. 
spectant  in  septentrionem.              they  face  the  north. 
spectant  in  orientem  solem.             they  face  the  east. 
spectant  in  occasum  solis.               they  face  the  west. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.   i 

15.  1.  The  Belgians  are  the  bravest  of  the  Gauls.  2.  But 
the  Helvetians  are  brave  too.  3.  For  this  reason  they  carry 
on  war  with  the  Germans.  4.  They  keep  them  off  from 
their  territory  by  almost  daily  battles.  5.  One  part  of  Gaul 
begins  at  the" river  Rhone.  6.  The  Garonne  is  another  river 
of  Gaul.  7.  The  territory  of  the  BelgJE  faces  northeast. 
8.  The  lower  part  of  Aquitania  stretches  to  the  Pyrenees 
mountains.     9.   Aquitania  faces  northwest. 

LESSON    III 

16.  Arrangement  of  Clauses.  —  §  600,  601  (346) ;  B.  351  ;  G.  684  ff. ; 
H.  681  ff.  (570  ff.)  ;   H-B.  626,  629. 

17.  Clauses  usually  precede  that  which  they  modify ;  but  the 
principal  verb  generally  precedes  clauses  of  purpose  or  result, 
substantive  clauses  in  indirect  discourse,  and  indirect  questions. 

Cum  asset  Caesar  in  citeriore  Gallia,  crebri  ad  eum  rumores  adfe- 
rebantur,  wheti  Ccpsar  was  in  hither  Caul,  frequent  reports 
were  brought  to  him. 


WORD-ORDER  AND    SENTENCE-STRUCTURE     5 

Verebantur  ne  ad  eos  exercitus  noster  adduceretur,  they  feared 
that  our  ar)iiy  would  be  led  against  them.  (Purpose 
clause.) 

Certior  fiebat  omnis  Belgas  obsides  inter  se  dare,  he  was  in- 
formed that  all  the  Belgce  were  giving  hostages  to  each 
other.     (Indir.  disc.) 

Quaesivit  quae  civitates  in  armis  essent,  he  asked  what  states 
were  in  arms.     (Indir.  question.) 

18.  When  the  stibject  is  the  same  in  both  the  principal  and  the 
subordinate  clause  it  normally  stands  first. 

Caesar,  ubi  intellexit  frustra  tantum  laborem  siimi,  statuit 
exspectandam  classem,  when  Casar  perceived  that  such 
great  labor  was  undertaken  in  vain,  he  determined  that 
his  fleet  must  be  waited  for.     (Common  subject  is  CcEsar.) 

19.  When  the  object  is  the  same  in  both  the  principal  and  the 
subordinate  clause  it  normally  stands  first. 

Oppidum,  cum  cives  fortissime  defenderent,  Caesar  expugnavit, 
Ccesar  took  the  town,  thotigh  the  citizens  defended  it  very 
bravely.     (Common  object  is  town.') 

20.  A  succession  of  monosyllabic  or  of  polysyllabic  words 
should  be  avoided,  as  also  the  heaping  up  of  a  number  of  verbs 
at  the  end  of  a  sentence.  These  are  sins  against  euphony  and 
rhythm  to  which  writers  of  good  Latin  are  always  very  attentive 
(cf.  sec.  9.  c). 

21.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

Messala  consule.  in  the  consulship  of  Messala. 

magno  dolore  adfici.  to  be  greatly  grieved. 

imperio  potiri.  to  secure  the  sovereignty. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  2 

22.  I.  Orgetorix,  who  was  the  richest  of  the  Helvetians, 
made  a  conspiracy.  2.  He  made  the  conspiracy  in  the  con- 
sulship of  Messala  and  Piso.    3.  He  persuaded  the  Helvetii 


6  LATIN   LOMTOSITION 

'that  ihey  excelled  all  in  valor.  4.  It  was  not  very  easy  to 
make  war  upon  the  neighbors.  5.  For  this  reason  it  came 
about  that  they  were  greatly  grieved.  6.  The  Helvetians 
were  fond  of  fighting.  7.  Orgetorix  will  persuade  them  to 
go  forth  from  their  boundaries.  8.  The  Helvetians  were 
hemmed  in  on  all  sides  by  rivers,  lakes,-  and  mountains. 
9.  Since  the  Helvetians^  had  narrow  boundaries,  they  could 
wander  less  widely.  10.  The  Helvetians  did  not  secure  the 
sovereignty  of  entire  Gaul. 

I.  Infin.  with  subject  accusative.  2.  lacubus,  not  lacibus,  cf.  Gram- 
mar.    3.  See  sec.  18. 

LESSON    IV 

23.  In  narrative  prose,  clauses  follow  each  other  in  the  order 
of  time  in  which  the  events  occurred.  English  is  less  exact  in 
this  respect,  and  we  sometimes  have  to  rearrange  a  passage,  in 
order  to  bring  events  into  their  proper  logical  sequence,  before 
translating  it  into  Latin. 

24.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

plurimom  posse  or  valere.  to  be  most  powerful  or  hiflu- 

ential. 
perfacile  factu.  vety  easy  to  do. 

in  matrimonium  dare.  to  give  in  7narriage. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  I.  3 

25.  The  Helvetii,  who  were  the  most  powerful  people  of 
entire  Gaul,  were  so^*  moved  by  these  considerations'^  that 
they  determined  ^to  do  what  was  necessary  for  their  depar- 
ture, and  chose  Orgetorix  to  carry  out  these  measures.^  He 
made  a  journey  to  the  nearest  states  and  persuaded  Casticus, 

»  A  superior  figure  after  a  word  (e.g.  so  l)  refers  to  that  word  alone ;  when 
placed  before  a  word  (e.g.  iso),  it  refers  to  two  or  more  following  words. 


RULES    FOR  AGREEMENT  7 

the  Sequanian,  to  seize  the  sovereignty  in  his  own  state ; 
and  he  also  persuaded  Dumnorix,  the  Hgeduan,  to  make 
the  same  attempt.  This  was  very  easy  to  do  because  he 
had  given  him  his  daughter  in  marriage.  There  was  no 
doubt  that  he  hoped  *to  gain  possession  of  entire  Gaul. 

I.  ita.  2.  res.  3.  Latin,  "  to  prepare  the  things  which  pertained  to." 
4.  Use  the  future  infin.  with  subject  ace. 

II.     RULES   FOR  AGREEMENT 
LESSON   V 

26.  I.  The  General  Forms  of  Agreement.  —  §  280  (181,  182);  G.  210, 
211.  R.  I ;  H-B.  316-318. 

II.  Noun  in  Apposition  or  as  Predicate.  —  §281-284(183-185);  B.  167- 
169;   G.  320-325,  386.  R.I ;   411. R.3;    H.  393  {362-364) ;   H-B.319.I,  II. 

27.  The  appositive  normally  follows  its  noun.  When  emphatic 
it  precedes. 

Caesar  imperator,  Ccesar,  the  general  (normal  order). 
Imperator  Caesar,  the  general,  Ccesar  (emphatic  order). 

28.  The  copula  sum  stands  last  or  between  the  subject  and 
predicate  :  Caesar  imperator  erat  or  Caesar  erat  imperator,  Casar 
was  general. 

N.B.  However,  when  sum  expresses  existence  (there  is,  there 
was,  etc.),  it  stands  first  or  at  any  rate  before  the  subject :  erat 
nullum  aliud  iter,  there  was  no  other  way. 

29.  A  noun  in  apposition  with  a  locative  is  put  in  the  ablative, 
either  with  or  without  a  preposition :  Romae  (in)  urbe  magna,  at 
Rome,  a  great  city. 

30.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

causam  dicere.  to  plead  a  cause. 

sibi  mortem  consciscere.  to  cotnniit  suicide. 


8  LAI  IN  coMrosnioN 

F(m  Oral  Tran.si.aiiox  —  Book  I.  4 

31.  1.    The  Hclvetii,  'a  Gallic  tribe,  made  a  conspiracy. 

2.  The  river  Rhone  divides  our  province  from  the  Helvetii. 

3.  At  that  time  Dumnorix,  the  brother  of  Diviciacus,  held 
the  leadership.  4.  The  father  of  Casticus  had  been  called  a 
friend  of  the  Roman  people.  5.  Orgetorix  pleaded  his  cause 
at  Geneva,-  the  largest  city  ^  of  the  Helvetians.  6.  The 
penalty  was  ''that  he  be  burned  with  fire.  7.  Orgetorix 
gathered  all  his  clansmen,  about  ten  thousand  men.  8.  The 
Helvetii  think  ^that  he  committed  suicide. 

I.  Gallica  gens.  2.  Locative  case.  3.  How  is  apposition  with  a 
locative  expressed  ?  4.  A  substantive  clause  used  as  predicate  noun. 
3.  Not  a  subjunctive  clause. 

LESSON   VI 

32.  Adjective  with  its  Noun.  — §  285-287  (186,  187);  B.  234,  235; 
G.  211,  285,  286;  H.  394,  395  (438,  439);   H-B.  320-321,  323. 

33.  When  a  noun  is  modified  by  both  an  adjective  and  a  geni- 
tive the  normal  order  is  adjective — genitive  —  noun:  omnes 
Helvetidrum  copiae. 

34.  Agreement  with  two  or  more  nouns  of  different  genders : 

a.  Tlie  attributive  adjective re,2;ularly  agrees  with  its  nearest  noun. 
Multi  pueri  et  puellae  or  pueri  et  puellae  multae,  many  boys 

and  girls. 

b.  The  predicate  adjective  is  regularly  niascuh'ne  plural  when 
it  modifies  two  or  more  nouns  representing  living  beings  of 
different  genders. 

Pueri  et  puellae  erant  bonl.  the  boys  and  girls  were  good. 
Rex  et  regina  capti  sunt,  the  king  and  queen  were  captured. 

c.  The  predicate  adjective  is  prevailingly  7ieuter  plural  when 
it  modifies  two  or  more  nouns  of  different  genders  representing 
things  or  both  persons  and  things. 


RULES   FOR  AGREEMENT  9 

Virtus  et  studium  militum  erant  magna,  the  valor  and  zeal  of 

the  soldiers  were  great. 
Naves  captivlque  restituta  sunt,  the  ships  and  the  captives  were 

restored. 

35.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

paratus  ad  omnia  pericula  sub-  ready  to  endure  all  perils. 

eunda. 

eodem  consilio  iiti.  to  adopt  the  same  plan. 

finitimis  persuadere.  to  persuade  the  neighbors. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  5 

36.  I.  Among  the  Helvetii  Orgetorix  was  by  far  the  rich- 
est. 2.  His  authority  and  ^ambition  for  power  were  very 
great.  3.  The  Helvetii  were  prepared  for  departure.  4.  All 
the  towns,  villages,  and  ^the  rest  of  the  private  buildings  were 
burned.  5.  They  intend,  to  carry  with  them  ground  corn  for 
three  months.  6.  Both  men  and  women  were  ready  to  endure 
all  perils.  7.  They  had  many  towns  and  villages.  8.  They 
persuade  the  Rauraci,  their  neighbors,  to  adopt  the  same  plan. 

I.  cupiditas  regni.     2    Latin,  "  the  remaining." 

LESSON   VII 

Agreement  of  Adjectives  —  Continued 
For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  6 

37.  I.  One  road  was  narrow  and  difficult.  2.  Mount  Jura 
is  very  high.  3.  Not  all  mountains  and  rivers  are  difficult. 
4.  The  other  route  was  much  easier.  5.  The  Helvetians 
were  hemmed  in  by  great  rivers,  lakes,  and'  mountains, 
6.  The  town  Geneva  is  very  near  to  the  province.  7.  The 
AUobroges  do  not  seem  well  disposed  towards  the  Roman 


10  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

people.  8.  We  shall  assemble  on  the  banks  of  the  river 
Rhone  on  the  twenty-eighth  of  March.  9.  All  the  men  and 
women  were  ready  for  departure. 

I.  Words  in  a  series  usually  follow  one  another  in  Latin  without  con- 
nectives. However,  the  different  words  may  be  severally  connected  by 
et,  or  -que  may  connect  the  last  two  of  the  series. 

LESSON   VIII 

38.  miOMS   AND  PHRASES 

iter  facere.  to  tnake  a  march. 

maximis  itineribus  contendere.  to  hasten  by  forced  tuarches. 

certior  fieri.  to  be  informed  (lit.  to  be  made 

more  certain). 
aliquem  certiorem  facere.  to  inform  some  one  (lit.  to  make 

some  one  more  certain). 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  I.  7 

39.  When,  in  the  consulship  of  Lucius  Piso  and  Aulus 
Gabinius,  the  Helvetians  ^  were  attempting  to  make  a  march 
through  our  province,  they  sent  to  Csesar  ambassadors,  the 
noblest  of  the  state,  to  say^  that  they  had  no  other  way;  and 
to  ask^  that  it  be  permitted  them  to  do  this  with  his  con- 
sent. Caesar,  who  was  at  Geneva,  a  frontier^  city  of  the 
Allobroges,  whither*  he  had  hastened  by  forced  marches 
*when  he  had  been  informed  of  the  approach  of  the  Hel- 
vetii,  did  not  think  that  the  request  should  be  granted. 

I.  Stands  first  as  the  subject  of  both  the  principal  and  the  subordinate 
clause,  cf.  sec.  18.  2.  Not  infinitive.  3.  extremus,  -a,  -um.  4.  quo. 
5.  cum  with  pluperf.  subjv. 


RULES   FOR   AGREEMENT  U 

LESSON   IX 

40.  Relative  with  its  Antecedent. —  §  305-306  (198,  199);  B.  250; 
G.  614;  H.  396-399  (445);  H-B.  z&i.a;  322,  284.2,3,4. 

41.  In  the  agreement  of  the  relative  pronoun  it  is  important  to 
observe  that,  while  the  pronoun  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in  gen- 
der and  in  numier,  its  case  is  determined  by  its  function  in  the 
relative  clause  which  it  serves  to  introduce.  Note  the  following 
examples :  — 

Caesar  milites  qui  timidi  erant  n6n  laudabat. 

Ccesar  did  not  praise  the  soldiers  who  were  afraid. 
Here  qui  agrees  with  milites  in  gender  and  in  number,  but  while 
milites  is  accusative  qui  is  nominative  as  subject  of  erant. 

Milites  quos  videmus  sunt  timidi. 

The  soldiers  whom  we  see  are  afraid. 
Here  milites  is  nominative  and  quos  is  accusative. 

Princeps  cuius  filius  est  captus  pacem  petebat. 

The  chief  whose  son  was  capttired  was  suing  for  peace. 
Here  princeps  is  nominative  and  ciiius  is  genitive.    Therefore,  when- 
ever the  relative  and  its  antecedent  are  in  the  same  case,  it  is  a  mere 
coincidence  and  not  at  all  due  to  grammatical  agreement. 

42.  A  relative  agrees  with  a  predicate  noun  in  its  own  clause 
rather  than  with  an  antecedent  of  different  gender  and  number. 

Rhenus  quod  est  flumen  Gallicum,  tiie  Rhine,  which  is  a  Gallic 
stream. 

43.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

fossam  perdiicere.  to  dig  a  ditch  (lit.  to  lead  along 

a  ditch). 
quo  facilius.  that  the  fnore  easily. 

iter  dare.  to  give  the  right  of  way. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  8 

44.  I.  The  legion  which  he  had  with  him  dug  a  ditch. 
2.  The  Helvetii,  who  are  a  Gallic  tribe, ^  sent  ambassadors 
to  Caesar.     3.   The  Jura  is  a  mountain  which  divides  the 


12  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

territory  of  tlie  Soquani  from  the  Helvetians.  4.  I  see  the 
great  wall  and  ditch  which  Caisar  made,  5.  The  custom 
and  precedent  which  the  Roman  people  have  established 
prevent  him  from  giving'^  a  right  of  way.  6.  They  attempted 
to  cross  by  boats  and  rafts  which  they  had  made.  7.  At 
night  they  attempted  to  break  through  by  the  fords  where 
the  depth  of  water  was  the  least.  8.  I  will  fortify  the 
redoubts  that  I  may  the  more  easily  restrain  you.  9.  The 
Rhone,  which  is  a  river  of  Gaul,  has  many  fords. 

1.  gens.     2.  Infinitive. 

LESSON    X 

45.  Verb  with  its  Subject.  —  §  316  (204);  B.  254;  G.  211  ;  II.  388, 
390,  391  (460,  462)  ;  M-B.  328,  329,  331.  I  ;  332. 

46.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

propter  angustias.  on  account  of  the  narrow  pass, 

quam  plurimae  civitates.  as  many  states  as  possible. 

novis  rebus  studere.  to  be  eager  for  a  revolution. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I,  9 

47.  I.  The    Helvetii    could   not    persuade    the    Sequani. 

2.  On  account  of  the  narrow  pass,  they  sent  ambassadors 
to  Dumnorix.  3.  He  was  very  influential  among  the  Hel- 
vetii. 4.  Orgetorix  had  given  him  his  daughter  in  marriage. 
5.  Dumnorix  bound  as  many  states  as  possible  by  his  per- 
sonal influence  and  lavish  gifts.  6.  He  undertook  the 
matter  because  he  was  eager  for  a  revolution.  7.  ^With  him 
as  advocate  they  ^obtained  their  request  from  the  Sequani. 
8.  The  Sequani  are^  a  Gallic  state.  9.  Mischief  and  wrong 
*must  be  prevented. 

I.  Abl.  abs.     2.   "obtained  their  request,"  translate  by  one  word. 

3.  est,  or  sunt,  or  either.'     4.  Second  periphrastic. 


RULES   FOR  AGREEMENT 


LESSON    XI 


13 


48.  Verb  with  Two  or  More  Subjects.  —  §  317  (205) ;  B.  255  ;  G.  285- 
287  ;  H.  392  (463);  H-B.  329,  331.  3. 

49.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

Helvetiis  est  in  animo.  the  Helvetians  are  planning. 

ob  eas  causas.  for  these  reasons. 

magno  cum  periculo  esse.  to  be  very  dangerojis. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  L  10 

50.  I.  'You  and  I  will  announce  to  Csesar  that  the  Hel- 
vetians are  planning  to  make  a  march  into  the  territory  of 
the  Santones.  2.  The  Sequani  and  Hsedui  are  not  far  from 
our  province.  3.  It  will  be  very  dangerous  to  the  province 
to  have  enemies"  of  the  Roman  people  as  neighbors.  4.  For 
these  reasons,  you  and  Ccesar  will  hasten  into  Farther  Gaul 
by  forced  marches.  5.  Two  legions  he  had  enrolled  in 
Italy.  6.  The  enemy  seize  the  higher  places.  7.  But  on 
the  seventh  day  Cassar  led  his  five  legions  among  the  Segu- 
siavi,  8.  These  five  legions  are^  Caesar's  army.  9.  Caesar 
and  his  legions  are  ill  disposed  towards  the  Gauls. 

I.  Latin,  "  I  and  you."  2.  inimlcl,  personal  enemies;  hostts,  enemies 
in  war.     3.  est  or  sunt  or  either .'' 

LESSON    XII 

5L  Review  the  rules  for  agreement,  Lessons  v-xi. 

52.  Review  the  following  idioms  and  phrases:  — 
ad  effeminandos  animos.  finitimis  persuadere. 

aliquem  certiSrem  facere.  fossam  perdurere. 

causam  dlcere.  Helvetiis  est  in  animo. 

certior  fieri.  imperio  potiri. 

eodem  c5nsilio  ilti.  in  matrimdnium  dare. 


14  LATIN    COMPOSIITON 

initium  capit  a.  perfacile  factu. 

inter  se  difierunt.  pluritnum  posse  or  valere. 

iter  dare.  propter  angustias. 

iter  facere.  qua  de  causa, 

magno  cum  periculo  esse.  quam  plurimae  clvitates. 

magno  dolore  adficl.  quo  facilius. 

maximis  itineribus  contendere.  sibi  mortem  consciscere. 

Messala  consule.  spectant  in  occasum  s51is. 

minime  saepe.  spectant  in  orientem  s51em. 

novis  rebus  studere.  spectant  in  septentridnem. 
Ob  eas  causas. 

paratus  ad  omnia  pericula  sub- 
eunda. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  I.   ii 

53.  Almost^  at  the  same  time  the  Haidui  and  Allobroges, 
—  allies  of  Coesar  who  had  at  all  times  deserved  well^  of  the 
Roman  people,  —  ^since  all  their  fortunes  were  being  con- 
sumed by  the  Helvetians,  sent  ambassadors  to  him  to  ask 
for  aid.  They  informed  him  that  their  fields,  villages,  and 
possessions  had  been  laid  waste  by  the  enemy,  and  that 
nothing  was  left  but  *the  bare  ground  ;  and  that  for  this  rea- 
son they  had  fled°  to  him.  ®0n  hearing  this  Cassar  made 
up  his  mind  that  he  ought  not  to  wait. 

I.  fere.  2.  bene.  3.  Subjv.  with  cum.  4.  Latin,  "  the  soil  of  the 
field."  5.  Latin,  "  betaken  themselves  by  flight."  6.  Abl.  abs.,  "  these 
things  having  been  heard." 

in.     THE   INDICATIVE   MOOD 
LESSON    XIII 

54.  I.  Tenses  of  the  Indicative,  General  Rules. —  §  437  (264)  ;  B.  257, 
258  ;  G.  222-226;   H.  523,  524  (474,  475)  ;   ll-V,.  468. 

II.  The  Present  Indicative.  —  §  465,  466,  469  (276) ;  B.  259;  G.  227- 
230;   H.  532,  533  (466,  467)  ;   H-B.  468.  I  ;  491.  i  ;  485. 


THE   INDICATIVE   MOOD  15 

55.  Present  Indefinite,  /  make,  "1  „   ,        1  .  j   t 

are  all  translated  by 
Present  Proe;ressive,  /  aiii,  maktne,  L,  r         ,    ._ 

°  '  *'  [the  one  form  facio. 

Present  Emphatic,  /  do  make,  J 

56.  Do  not  be  misled  by  such  English  expressions  as  I  am  goitig 
soon,  I  sail  next  week,  I  play  to-viorrow.  These  are  not  really/;-^^- 
ents  \>\x\  futures,  and  are  rendered  in  Latin  by  the  future  tense. 

57.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

de  tertia  vigilia.  about  the  third  watch. 

sub  iugum  mittere.  to  send  under  the  yoke. 

calamitatem  alicui  inferre.  to  bring  calamity  upon  some  one. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.   12 

58.  I.  The  river  Saone  is  of  incredible  slowness.  2.  The 
Helvetii  ^are  attempting  to  cross  this  with  their  rafts. 
3.  Scouts  inform  Caesar  that  three  parts  of  the  Helvetii 
have  already  been  led  across.  4.  Csesar  attacks  the  Tigurini, 
who  have  not  yet  crossed  the  river.  5.  This  canton,  in  the 
memory  of  our  fathers,  brought  great  calamity  upon  the 
Roman  people.  6.  Caesar  has  '^for  some  time  wished  to 
avenge  this  injury.  7.  He  sets  out  from  the  camp  about  the 
third  watch.  8.  The  army  of  Cassius,  the  consul,  has  long 
since  been  sent  under  the  yoke.  9.  The  immortal  gods  do 
avenge  wrongs. 

I.  Express  with  conor.     2.  iam  diu. 

LESSON    XIV 

59.  The  Imperfect  Indicative. —  §  470,  471.  a,  h,  c  (277.  N.  a,  b,  c) ;  B. 
260;  G.  231-234;  11.  530,  534.  2,  3;  535  (468,  469.  I,  II.  1,2);  II-B. 
468.  2  ;  484,  485. 

60.  The  imperfect  may  express  attempted  action,  but  if  there 
be  danger  of  ambiguity  it  is  best  to  use  conor,  attempt,  with  the 
infinitive. 


l6  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

61.  Tile  most  important  uses  of  the  imperfect  are  two  :  — 
<;.   To  express  customary  or  continued  action  in  past  time. 

t>.  To  describe  situations,  fill  in  details  and  particulars ;  while 
the  important  forward  steps  in  the  narrative  are  denoted  by  the 
perfect. 

This  difference  between  the  perfect  and  the  imperfect  is  well 
illustrated  by  the  latter  half  of  Chapter  7,  beginning  Caesar  quod, 
etc.  The  situation  is  described  by  the  imperfects,  tenebat,  puta- 
bat,  existimabat.  These  are  all  preparatory  to  the  first  decisive 
and  important  act  on  Caesar's  part,  expressed  by  the  words  respondit 
diem  se  ad  deliberandum  sumpturum. 

62.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

hoc  proelio  facto.  after  this  battle  was  fought. 

pontem  faciendum  curare.  to  see  to  building  a  bridge. 

calamitatis  remimsci.  to  remember  the  disaster. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.   13 

63.  I.  He  ^attempted  to  overtake  the  forces  of  the  Hel- 
vetians. 2.  He  sees  to  building  a  bridge  over  the  Saone. 
3.  After  this  battle  was  fought  they  kept  sending  ambassa- 
dors to  him.  4.  Divico  had  now  for  a  long  time  been  the 
leader  of  the  Helvetians.  5.  The  Helvetians  were  going 
into  that  part  where  Caesar  did  not  wish  them  to  be.  6.  He 
attacked  those  who  were  crossing  the  river.  7.  They  remem- 
bered the  former  disaster  and  the  destruction  of  the  Roman 
army.  8.  The  canton  which  was  called^  Tigurinus  relied^ 
upon  valor  more  than  upon  strategy.  9.  They  had  *long 
since  learned  this  from  their  ancestors. 

I.  Imperfect  of  attempted  action.  2.  Descriptive  imperfect.  3.  Im- 
perfect if  regarded  as  descriptive,  perfect  if  narrative.     4.  iam  dudum. 


THE   INDICATIVE   MOOD  \'J 

LESSON    XV 

64.  The  Perfect  Indicative.  —  §  i6i,  473, 474, 476  (i  15.  c  ;  279.  a,  e) ;  B. 
262;  0.235,236,239,240;  H.  538(471.1,2,3);  H-B.  468. 4.^:487,  489. 

65.  The  following  perfects  have  the  force  of  the  English 
present : — 

novi,  /  know  (Jiave  learned)^  from  nosco,  /  learn. 

consuevi,  /  am  accustomed  (Jiave  becovie  accustomed^,  from 

c6nsuesc5,  /  become  accustomed. 
memini,  /  remeinber,  present  system  wanting, 
odi,  /  hate,  present  system  wanting. 
The  pluperfect  of  these  verbs  has  the  meaning  of  the  imperfect: 
noveram,  I  knew  {^itad  learned),  etc. 

66.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

memoria  tenere.  to  refnember. 

contumeliae  oblivisci.  to  forget  an  insult. 

iniurias  alicui  inferre.  to  inflict  injuries  upon  some  one. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.   14 

67.  I.  I  remember  those  things  that  the  Helvetii  have 
mentioned.  2.  I  have  the  less  hesitation  because  I  have 
been  deceived.  3.  He  did  not  think  that  the  Roman  peo- 
ple^ ought  to  fear.  4.  Cassar  did  not  forget  the  former 
insult.  5.  They  boasted  insolently  of  their  victory.  6.  You 
have  inflicted  injuries  a  long  time  with  impunity.  7.  The 
immortal  gods  are  wont  to  grant  greater  prosperity  to  those 
whom  they  wish  to  punish.  8.  They  '^paid  damages  to  the 
Haedui  for  the  wrongs  which  they  had  inflicted  on  them. 
9.  The  Helvetii  are  wont  to  receive  hostages,  not  to  give 
them.     10.  The  Helvetii  hate  the  Romans. 

I.  Dative  of  agent.     2.  satisfaci3. 


l8  LATIN    COMl'USrnON 

LESSON    XVI 

68.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

posters  die.  tlie  next  day. 

novissimum  agmen.  the  rear. 

proelium  committere.  to  engage  in  battle. 

For  Wriiten  Translation  —  Book  I.  15 

69.  On  the  next  day  both  Cnesar  and  the  Helvetii  moved 
their  camps,  and  Caesar  sent  forward  the  cavalry  which  he 
had^  collected  from  the  province  and  his  allies,  ^to  keep 
the  enemy  from  plundering.  The  Roman  cavalry  *was  pur- 
suing too  eagerly,  and  engaged^  in  battle  with  five  hundred 
Helvetian  horsemen  in  an  unfavorable  place.  These  boldly 
provoked  our  (soldiers^)  to  battle  and  defeated  (them).  There 
was  no  more  than  five  or  six  miles  between  the  rear  of  the 
enemy  and  our  van,  but*^  Caisar  kept^  his  men  from  fighting 
for  fifteen  days. 

I.  Continued  and  descriptive  action  in  past  time.  What  tense? 
2.  Not  infin.  3.  Imperf.  of  continued  action  in  past  time.  4.  Perfect 
in  narration.     5.   Omit  words  in  parenthesis.     6.  tamen. 

LESSON   XVII 

70.  The  Future,  Future  Perfect,  and  Pluperfect  Indicative.  —  §472, 
477,  478  (278,  281,  280);  B.  261,  264,  263;  G.  242-244,  241  ;  H.  536, 
540,  539  (470,  473'  472) ;  H-B.  468.  3,  5,  6;  494. 

71.  Latin  is  much  more  exact  than  English  in  the  use  of  tenses. 
Attention  has  already  been  called  to  the  common  use  of  the  English 
present  for  what  is  really  future  (cf.  .sec.  56)  ;  in  like  manner  Eng- 
lish often  uses  a  present  or  future  for  what  is  really  future  perfect. 
In  every  instance  the  Latin  will  use  the  exact  ten&e.  Hence  the 
future  perfect  is  much  commoner  in  Latin  t^an  in  Er^jlish. 


THE   SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD  I9 

For  example,  in  he  will  come  if  he  can,  the  word  can  is  really 
future  and  we  should  translate  veniet,  si  poterit ;  in  if  they  conquer, 
they  will  rejoice,  the  verb  conquer  may  be  future  or  even  future 
perfect,  and  we  translate  si  vincent  (or  vicerint),  laetabuntur. 

72.  IDIOMS  AND   PHRASES 

Haeduos  frumentum  flagitare.  to    demand  grain    from    the 

HcEdiii. 
magistratui  praeesse.  to  hold  an  office. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.   16 

73.  I.  Casar  ^had  now  for  a  long  time  been  demanding 
grain  from  the  Haedui.  2.  On  account  of  frosts  the  grain 
will  not  be  ripe.  3.  Grain  had  been  brought  up  the  river 
Saone  by  boats.  4.  If  the  Helvetii  turn^  their  march  away 
from  the  river,  Caesar  cannot^  use  their  grain.  5.  Not  even 
Diviciacus^  will  be  able  to  buy  grain.  6.  The  day  is  at 
hand  when  it  will  be  necessary  to  call  the  chiefs  together. 

7.  I  will  severely  censure  them,  if  they  ^do  not  assist  me. 

8.  He  had  undertaken  the  war  at  a  critical  time.     9.  He 
severely  censured  Liscus,  who  held  the  highest  office. 

I.  Not  pluperf.  2.  Latin,  "shall  have  turned."  3.  Not  present. 
4.  Where  should  this  word  be  placed  ?     5.  Latin,  "  shall  not  assist." 


IV.     THE   SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD   IN   INDEPENDENT 
SENTENCES 

LESSON  xvni 

74.  I.  The  Subjunctive  in  General.  —  §  438  (265);  B.  272;  G.  255, 
256;  H.  193,  194  {196.  I,  II)  ;  H-B.  462. 

II.  The  Hortatory  or  Volitive  Subjunctive.  —  §  439,  450  (3)  (266.  R.  b)  ; 
B.  273-276;  G.  263-264;  H.  559.  I,  2  (483.  3;  484-  II.  IV);  H-B.  500 
501.  2,  3. 


20  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

75.  The  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  in  independent  clauses 
denote  lime  as  follows  :  — 

a.  Present  denotes /u fare  or  indejitiite  time. 

Subjunctive     b.  Imperfect  denotes /r^j^;// or /a^-/ time. 

Tenses,      i  c.  Perfect  denotes /«/«r(?  ox  past  time. 

\d.  Pluperfect  denotes /aj/ time. 

It  will  be  seen  that  though  the  subjunctive  has  no  future  tenses 
the  future  idea  is  inherent  in  both  the  present  and  the  perfect 
tense.  When  the  future  idea  is  emphatic  the  first  periphrastic 
forms  are  used  (e.g.  amaturus  sim). 

76.  The  Latin  subjunctive  in  some  of  its  constructions  approaches 
the  meaning  of  the  English  potential  auxiliaries  :  inay^  can,  must, 
might,  could,  ivould,  should.  But  when  these  auxiliaries  are  literal 
and  emphatic  they  must  be  rendered  by  independent  verbs,  as  may, 
might,  by  licet ;  can,  could,  by  possum  ;  should  by  debeo,  etc. 

77.  Many  subjunctive  constructions  are  translated  by  the  Eng- 
lish indicative  and  show  no  special  form  or  modal  auxiliary.  In 
such  cases,  therefore,  there  is  nothing  in  the  English  to  show  that 
the  Latin  subjunctive  must  be  used  :  e.g.  scio  quid  facias,  I  know 
what  you  are  doing ;  tanta  erat  tempestas  ut  naves  dispellerentur, 
the  storm  was  so  great  that  the  ships  were  scattered. 

78.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  independent  sentences  to 
express  — 

1.  An  exhortation  or  command  (Hortatory  or  Volitive).  Nega- 
tive is  ne. 

2.  A  wish  or  desire  (Optative).     Negative  is  ne. 

3.  A  rhetorical  question  expressing  doubt  or  indignation  (Delib- 
erative).    Negative  is  non. 

4.  A  possibility  (Potential).     Negative  is  non. 

79.  The  Hortatory  Subjunctive  in  its  usual  form  is  in  the  first 
or  third  person  of  the  present  tense,  and  is  introduced  in  English 
by  let.  When  expressing  a  command  it  is  sometimes  called  the 
jussive  (cf.  iubeo)  subjunctive. 


THE   SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD  21 

80.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

libertatem  alicui  eripere.  to  deprive  some  one  of  liberty 

(to  take  liberty  from  some 
one^. 

magna  e?  parte.  in  great  measure. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.   17 

81.  I.  Let  us  demand  grain  of  the  Heedui.  2.  Let  Liscus 
declare  what  he  has  before  kept  secret.  3.  ^Do  not  keep 
the  multitude  from  giving  grain.  4.  Let  us  obtain  the  chief 
power  in  Gaul  ^and  not  endure  the  dominion  of  the  Romans. 
5.  ^Do  not  doubt  that  the  Romans  ^intend  to  conquer  the 
Helvetians.  6.  Let  us  not  deprive  the  Gauls  of  their  liberty. 
7.  ^Do  not  announce  our  plan  to  the  enemy.  8.  Let  him 
keep  silence  as  long  as  he  can.  9.  Liscus  was  influenced 
in  great  measure  by  Caesar's  speech. 

I.  Hortatorysubjv.  in  a  prohibition.  Either  the  present  or  the  perfect 
tense  may  be  used,  but  the  perfect  is  more  common.  Remember,  how- 
ever, that  prohibition  is  usually  expressed  by  noli  or  nolite  with  the  infin. 
2.  neve.     3.  Express  by  the  first  periphrastic.     Cf.  sint  erepturi. 


LESSON    XIX 

82.  The  Optative  Subjunctive.  —  §441,442  (267.  a,  <^) ;  B.  279;  G.  260, 
261 ;   H.  558.  I,  2  (483.  I,  2,  3;  484.  I);   H-B.  510,  511.  i. 

83.  Wishes  are  expressed  by  the  present,  imperfect,  and  plu- 
perfect subjunctive.  Utinam  is  always  used  with  the  imperfect 
and  the  pluperfect,  sometimes  with  the  present.  The  negative  is 
ne.     The  force  of  the  tenses  is  as  follows :  — 

a.  The  present  denotes  a  wish  that  is  still  possible  because  it 
lies  in  the  future:  vivas  fellciter,  may  you  live  happily  ! 

b.  The  imperfect  expresses  a  wish  unattained  in  present  time, 
the  pluperfect  one  unattained  in  past  time  :  utinam  viveret  feliciter, 


22  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

would  that  he  tvere  Ih'ing  happily  (hut  lie  is  n't)  ;  utinam  vlxis- 
set  feliciter,  would  that  he  had  lii'cd  happily  (but  lie  did  n't). 

84.  The  sign  in  English  of  the  optative  subjunctive  is  may  (in 
a  wish  or  prayer)  or  would  that,  or  more  colloquially,  /  wish  that, 
grant  that,  J  hope  that,  if  only,  it  would  be  a  good  thing  if ,  etc. 

85.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

pluribus  praesentibus.  i)i  the  presence  of  others. 

cupidus  rerum  novarum.  eager  for  a  revolution. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.   i8 

86.  I.  Let  us  not  discuss  these  matters  in  the  presence 
of  others.  2.  Would  that  we  were  finding  these  things  to 
be  true.  3.  Would  that  Dumnorix  had  not  been  eager  for 
a  revolution.  4.  I  hope  that  you  may  buy  the  revenue  at  a 
small  price.  5.  Would  that  we  had  provided  large  means 
for  bribery.  6.  I  hope  you  may  not  find  on  examination 
that  Dumnorix  is  in  command  of  the  cavalry.  7.  If  only 
you  and  Caesar  and  the  Romans  had  not  restored  my  brother 
to  his  former  place  of  influence  !  8.  ■*  Do  not  give  your 
sister  in  marriage  to  Dumnorix,  9.  Grant  that  nothing 
may  happen  to  Caesar. 

1.  Give  the  prohibition  in  two  ways. 

LESSON   XX 

87.  IDIOMS   AND  PHRASES 

obsides  inter  e03  dand5s  curare.         to  see  to  the  exchange  of  hostages. 
me  praesente.  in  my  presence. 

satis  causae.  sufficient  reason. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  I.  19 

88.  Caesar  commanded  Diviciacus  to  be  called  to  him  and 
spoke  ^as  follows:  "^ Would  that  there  were  not  sufificient 


THE   SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD  23 

reason  for  commanding^  the  state  to  punish  your  brother  Dum- 
norix.  Let  me  show  the  things  that  were  said  about  him  in 
my  presence  in  the  council.  Without  my  order  and  without 
the  knowledge  of  the  state  he  led  the  Helvetii  through  the  ter- 
ritory of  the  Sequani  and  saw  to  the  exchange  of  hostages. 
*I  hope  that  I  may  not  hurt  your  feelings  by  his  punishment." 

I.  ita.  2.  Observe  that  this  is  (^//r^-,:/,  not /«(f/Vr<r^  discourse.  3.  Imperf. 
subjv.     4.  Cf.  sec.  84. 

*LESSON    XXI 

89.  The  Subjunctive  in  Rhetorical  or  Deliberative  Questions.  —  §  444 

(268);  B.  277;  G.  465.  466;   H.  559.  4  (4S4-  V)  ;   H-B.  503,  513.  i. 

90.  The  Rhetorical  or  Deliberative  Question  partakes  of  the 
character  of  an  exclamation.  It  is  usually  in  the  first  person  and 
does  not  expect  a  reply.  It  may  be  expressed  by  either  the  indica- 
tive or  the  subjunctive.  The  indicative  presents  no  peculiarities. 
If  the  subjunctive  is  used,  the  present  tense  translates  an  English 
present  or  future,  and  the  imperfect  the  English  past:  — 

C  am  I  to  '\ 
What\  should  I  \-  advise yozi  ?  quid  te  moneam? 
\shall  I    J 

What  was  I  to  do  ?  quid  facerem  ? 
The  negative  is  non. 

91.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

pliis  doloris  capere.  to  be  more  grieved. 

opibus  iiti.  to  use  resources. 

in  reliquum  tempus.  for  the  future. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  20 

92.  I .  *  Do  not  take  severe  measures  against  my  brother. 
2.   How^  shall  I  know  that  those  things  are  true?     3.  Who 

*  Lcssor.s  thus  marked  may  be  omitted  at  the  discretion  of  tlie  teacher. 
See  Preface. 


24  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

will  be  more  grieved  than  I?  4.  Let  Diviciacus,  who  is 
very  powerful  at  home,  use  his  resources.  5.  Shall  I  weaken 
my  intluence  because  of  love  for  my  brother?  6.  Who  will 
not  think  that  it  has  been  done  with  my  consent?  7.  May 
the  hearts  of  all  (Jaul  not  be  turned  from  me  1  8.  Would 
that  I  had  warned  him  to  avoid  all  suspicions !  9.  When 
he  begged  this  with  tears,  what  was  I  to  do  ?  10.  What 
shall  I  do  for  the  future  ? 

I.  Express  in  two  ways,  cf.  sec.  81,  note  i.     2.  quomodo. 

LESSON   XXII 

93.  The  Potential  Subjunctive.  —  §446,447.  1,2,3(311.  I,  II) ;  B.  280: 
G-  257-259;   11.552-557(485,486);  H-B.  516,  517.  i;  518,519.1.0,^5. 

94.  The  Potential  Subjunctive  represents  the  action  as  conceived 
ox  possible,  not  as  desired  (hortatory,  optative)  or  real  (indicative). 
It  has  no  single  English  equivalent;  but  is  rendered  according 
to  circumstances  by  the  auxiliaries  would,  should,  may,  might, 
can,  could  (cf.  sec.  76).     The  negative  is  n5n. 

95.  The  chief  uses  of  the  Potential  may  be  classified  as 
follows :  — 

1.  Inpoliteor  modest  assertions  —  first  person  singular  presenter 
perfect :  velim,  /  should  like;  dicam,  /  shojild  feel  inclined  to  say. 

2.  With  verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  and  tlT£  like,  to  express  an 
opinion  —  usually  in  the  indefinite  second  person  singular,  present 
or  imperfect.  The  imperfect  expresses  past  time  and  is  translated 
like  a  pluperfect :  diceres,  yo7i  would  have  said ;  crederes,  you 
would  have  believed ;  videres,  you  tnight  have  seen. 

3.  In  general  to  express  an  action  2lS  possible,  and  equivalent  to 
the  conclusion  of  an  implied  condition :  ille  id  faciat,  he  would 
do  this  (i.e.  if  he  should  be  called  upon). 

96.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 
octo  milia  passuum.  '"^'c^^^  miles. 

rei  militaris  peritissimua.  experienced  in  military  matters. 


THE    IMPERATIVE   MOOD  25 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  21 

97.  I.  Let  us  encamp  eight  miles  from  Caesar's  camp. 
2.  It  would  be  easy  to  find  out  what  the  character  of  the 
mountains  is.  3.  About  the  third  watch  you  might  have 
seen  Labienus  with  his  legions  climbing^  the  highest  ridge. 
4.  I  should  feel  inclined  to  say  that  those  guides  know^  the 
way.  5.  Let  us  show  what  our  plan  is.  6.  You  might  have 
thought  that  Considius  was  experienced  in  military  matters. 
7.  Let  the  cavalry  and  the  scouts  be  sent  forward.  8.  ^I  wish 
that  they  had  found  out  what  the  ascent  was  on  the  various 
sides.     9.  I  should  like  to  send  forward  the  cavalry. 

I.  Pres.  part.  2.  Remember  that  the  verb  cognoscere  means  to  learn 
in  the  present  tenses  and  to  know  in  the  perfect.     3.  Cf.  sec.  84. 

V.     THE  IMPERATIVE   MOOD 
LESSON   XXIII 

98.  The  Imperative  Mood.  —  §  448,  449,  450  (269.  d,  e) ;  B.  281.  i,  2  ; 
G.  266,  267.  R. ;  H.  560,  561  (487.  I,  2  ;  4S8,  489) ;  H-B.  495,  496,  501.  3. 
a.  I),  2). 

99.  (      I.  By  noli  (plural  nolite)   with   the  present 

infinitive :  noli  pugnare,  douH  fight. 
Prohibitions  2.  By  cave  (sometimes  cave  ne  or  fac  ne) 

are  expressed  in<  with  the  present  subjunctive  :  cave  piignes,  donH 
classic  prose       fight. 

3.  By  ne  with   the  perfect  subjunctive :   ne 
piignaveris,  doti't fight. 
Of  these  the  first  is  used  oftenest.     The  last  is  less  formal  and 
more  peremptory^ 

100  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 
summus  mons  tlie  top  of  the  mountain. 

aciem  instruere.  to  draw  up  the  line  of  battle. 

proelio  abstinere.  to  refrain  from  ba^le. 


26 


LATIN    COMPOSniON 


I'\>K  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  22 

101.  I.  Let  Labienus  occupy  the  top  of  the  mountain. 
2.  Find  out  from  the  captives  whether^  my  approach  is 
known. ^  3.  *Uon't  join  battle.  4.  Draw  up  the  line  of 
battle  not  more  than  a  mile  and  a  half  from  the  mountain. 
5.  Would  that  Labienus  had  seen  Caesar's  troops  near  the 
camp  of  the  enemy.  6.  ''Shall  I  wait  for  our  men  and 
refrain  from  battle .''  7.  Don't  report  as  seen  that  which 
you  have  not  seen.  8.  Lead  your  forces  on  to  the  nearest 
hill  and  attack  the  enemy.  9.  Late  in  the  day  the  camp 
was  pitched  at  the  customary  distance.  10.  *  Don't  follow 
the  enemy. 

I.  si.  2.  Cf.  sec.  97,  note  2.  3.  Express  in  as  many  ways  as  you 
can.     4.  Deliberative  question. 


LESSON    XXIV 


102.  Review  the  Rules  of 

103.  Review  the  following 
aciem  instruere. 
calamitatis  reminisci. 
contumehae  oblivisci. 
cupidus  rerum  novarum. 

de  tertia  vigilia. 

Haeduos  friimentum  flagitare. 

hoc  proelio  fact5. 

iniurias  alicui  inferre. 

in  reliquum  tempos. 

libertatem  alicui  eripere. 

magistratui  praeesse. 

magna  ex  parte. 

memoria  tenere. 

me  praesente. 


Syntax,  Lessons  xin-xxin. 

idioms  and  phrases  :  — 
novissimum  agmen. 
obsides  inter  e5s  dandos  curare, 
octo  miha  passuum. 
opibus  iiti. 

pliiribus  praesentibus. 
plus  doloris  capere. 
pontem  faciendum  curare. 
posters  die. 
proelio  abstinere. 
proelium  committere. 
rel  militaris  peritissimus. 
satis  causae. 
summus  m5ns. 


DEPENDENT  MOODS  AND  TENSES      27 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  I.  23,  24 

104.  On  the  next  day  Caesar,  changing  his  hne  of  march, 
hastened  to  go  to  Bibracte,  which  was  the  richest  city  of  the 
Haedui  and  not  more  than  eighteen  miles  distant,  because 
in  two  days^  it  -would  be  necessary  to  measure  out  grain  to 
the  army.  The  Helvetii  thought  that  he  was  frightened, 
and  began  to  follow  and  harass  ours  on  the  rear.  But 
Csesar  led  his  forces  to  the  nearest  hill,  and,  ^drawing  up 
his  line  of  battle,  said  :  "  Gather  the  packs  into  one  place, 
and  let  the  two  legions  which  I  last  enrolled  be  stationed 
on  the  top  of  yonder*  ridge." 

I.  Abl.  of  time.  2.  Imperf.  subjv.  on  the  principle  of  implied  indir. 
disc.     3.  Abl.  abs.     4.  ille. 

VI.     MOODS   AND   TENSES   IN   DEPENDENT   AND 
SUBSTANTIVE   CLAUSES 

LESSON   XXV 

105.  Sequence  of  Tenses.  — §  482-484  (284-286.  R.) ;  B.  266,  267  ;  G. 
509  ff. ;  H.  543-545  {490-494) ;  H-B.  476. 

106.  The  Sequence  of  Tenses  is  nothing  peculiar  to  Latin,  but 
is  familiar  from  English  usage.     Compare  — 

He  fears  that  he  may  die. 
He  feared  that  he  might  die. 

The  change  from  may  to  might,  owing  to  the  change  in  the  main 
verb  from  fears  to  feared,  corresponds  to  the  change  in  Latin  from 
the  present  to  the  imperfect  subjunctive.  The  above  in  Latin 
would  be-  Timet  ne  moriatur. 

Timebat  ne  moreretur. 

The  laws  of  Tense-Sequence  do  not  apply  with  equal  stringency 
to  all  dependent  constructions  and  were  often  disregarded. 


28 


LATIN    COMrOSITION 


107.  Table  for  Sequence  of  Tenses 


Dependent 

SlinjUNCTIVE 

Principal  Verb 

Incomplktb  or  Con- 
TiNTHn  Action 

CoMPLBTBD  Action 

> 

Present 

^ 

Future 

Present 

Perfect 

- 

Future  Perfect 

> 

Imperfect 

z 

Perfect 

Imperfect 

Pluperfect 

Pluperfect 

108.  IDIOMS  AND   PHRASES 

impetum  facere  in  aliquem.  to  }nake  an  attack  on  sotne  one. 

conversa  signa  inferre.  to  face  about  and  charge. 

se  recipere.  to  retreat. 


For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  25 

109.  I.  Let  us  remove  the  horses  to  make  the  danger  of  all 
equal.  2.  The  soldiers  hurled  their  javelins  to  break  through 
the  phalanx  of  the  enemy.  3.  They  had  drawn  their  swords 
to  make  an  attack  upon  us.  4.  The  Gauls  were  so^  hindered 
that  many  threw  their  shields  away.  5.  The  iron  has  bent'^ 
so  that  we  cannot  draw  it  out.  6.  They  were  so^  worn  out 
with  wounds  that  they  retreated  to  the  mountain.  7.  The 
Tulingi,  who  are  guarding  the  rear,  will  exhort  the  Helvetii 
to  renew  the  battle.  8.  They  were  fighting  with  body 
unprotected  in  order  that  their  shields  might  not  be  *a  hin- 
drance to  them.     9.  ^ Shall  we  face  about  and  charge? 

i.adeo.  2.  Latin,  "  bent  itself."  3.  tam.  4.  Latin,  "for  a  hindrance 
to  themselves."     5.  A  deliberative  question.     Cf.  sec.  90. 


DEPENDENT   MOODS  AND   TENSES  29 


LESSON    XXVI 

110.  Peculiarities  in  Tense-Sequence.  —  §  485.  a,  b,  c,  e,  g,  h  (287.  a,  b-, 
c,  e,f);  B.  268.  1-6;   G.  509.  2;   H.  546-550  (495.  I-VI) ;   H-13.  478. 

111.  Note  that  after  a  primary  tense  the  perfect  subjunctive 
must  be  used  to  denote  any  past  action,  e.g.  — 

{have  written^     -,,.._ 

I  non  dubito  quin  scrip- 
I  do  not  doubt  that  they<  were  writing.  V 


\^  wrote. 

112.  The  Historical  Present  takes  either  the  primary  or  the 
secondary  sequence. 

113.  The  Perfect  Definite  (perfect  with  have)  talces  the  second- 
ary sequence  unless  the  reference  to  present  time  is  very  distinct. 

114.  The  most  important  exception  to  the  rules  for  tense- 
sequence  is  that  in  Clauses  of  Result  (Consecutive  Clauses)  com- 
pleted action  is  regularly  expressed  by  the  Perfect  Subjunctive 
after  secondary  as  well  as  after  primary  tenses.  However,  if  tlie 
action  is  regarded  as  continued  or  incomplete,  the  Imperfect  Sub- 
junctive should  be  used  here  as  elsewhere  after  a  secondary  tense. 

115.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

acriter  piignatum  est.  the    battle    has    been    sharply 

fought,  there  has  been  sharp 
fighting. 

alter!  .  .  .  alteri.  the  one  party  . . .  t]ie  other  party. 

ad  multam  noctem.  ////  late  at  night. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.   26 

116.  I.  The  battle  has  been  so  sharply  foup;ht  that  no  one 
can  see  an  enemy  in  retreat.  2.  The  one  party  retreats^ 
to  the  mountain,  the  other  withdraws  to  the  wagons  to 
escape^  the  attacks  of  our  (men).  3.  That  they  might 
wound  our  men,  they  kept  hurling  javelins  till  late  at  night. 
4.  Let  us  take  possession  of  the  baggage  ^that  they  may  not 


30  LATIN   COMPOSITION 

pile  up  the  carts  for  a  rampart.  5.  They  march ^  continu- 
ally all  night  that  they  may  arrive  in  the  territory  of  the 
Lingones.  6.  Cassar  has  sent  a  letter  to  the  Lingones  that 
llicy  may  not  assist  the  enemy.  7.  He  *  tells  in  what  light 
he  regards  them.  8.  He  told  in  what  light  he  had  regarded 
them.  9.  He  is  telling  in  what  light  *he  will  regard  them. 
10.  He  has  told  in  what  light  he  regards  them.  11.  He  tells 
in  what  light  he  was  regarding  them. 

I.  Historical  present.  2.  effugio.  3.  ne,  negative  purpose.  4.  dico, 
here  followed  by  an  indirect  question.     5.  First  periphrastic,  cf.  sec.  219. 

LESSON   XXVII 

117.  Pure  and  Relative  Clauses  of  Purpose.  —  §  530,  531  (317.  i,  2.  <5) ; 
B.  282;  G.  543,  544.  I ;  545;  H.  568,  590  (497) ;  H-B.  502.  2. 

118.  Relative  clauses  are  used  in  Latin  not  alone  to  state  a  fact 
about  the  antecedent,  but  may  be  used  as  well  to  txpress  purpose, 
result,  characteristic,  cause,  or  concession.  The  subjunctive  mood 
is  used  in  all  such  cases.     The  indicative  merely  states  a  fact. 

119.  A  test  for  a  relative  clause  of  purpose  is  that  ut  with  a 
personal  or  demonstrative  pronoun  may  be  substituted  for  the 
relative  pronoun,  e.g.  — 

Mlsit  milites  qui  viderent  =  misit  milites  ut  (ii)  viderent. 

He  sent  soldiers  who  should  see  =  he  sent  soldiers  that  they 

might  see. 

120.  The  difference  in  emphasis  between  a  clause  of  purpose 
introduced  by  ut  and  one  introduced  by  a  relative  pronoun  may 
be  illustrated  by  the  following  sentence :  — 

a.  legates  mlsit  ut  peterent  pacem. 

b.  misit  legates  qui  peterent  pacem. 

Either  form  of  the  sentence  may  be  translated  he  sent  ambassa- 
dors to  seek  peace.  But  in  a  the  ut-clause  is  an  adverbial  modifier 
of  misit  and  emphasizes  the  purpose  of  the  sending.     In  b  the 


DEPENDENT  MOODS  AND   TENSES  31 

qui-clause  is  an  adjective  modifier  of  legates  and  emphasizes  the 
ambassadors  as  the  persons  who  have  a  purpose  to  perform. 

121.  quo  (abl.  of  the  relative)  is  used  to  introduce  a  purpose 
clause  containing  a  comparative,  quo  =  ut  eo,  and  is  the  abl.  of 
degree  of  difference  :  — 

Pontem  facit  quo  facilius  transeat,  he  builds  a  bridge  that  he 
may  cross  viore  easily  (lit.  by  which  the  ??tore  easily). 

Classem  c5git  quo  paratior  esse  possit,  he  collects  a  fleet  that 
he  viay  be  more  prepared. 

122.  In  English,  purpose  is  often  expressed  by  the  infinitive :  — 
She  stoops  to  conquer.     He  sent  ambassadors  to  seek  peace. 

It  is  never  so  expressed  in  the  best  classic  Latin  prose. 

123.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

in  itinere.  on  the  way. 

arma  tradere.  to  surrender  artns. 

prima  nocte.  the  first  part  of  the  night. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  27,  28 

124.  I,  The  Helvetii  will  send  legates  to  him  ^to  beg  for 
peace.  2.  They  met  him  on  the  way  to  talk  ^the  sooner 
about  a  surrender.  3.  Six  thousand  men  hastened  to  the 
Rhine  that  they  might  not  surrender  their  arms.  4.  They 
went  in  the  first  part  of  the  night  the  better^  to  conceal  their 
flight.  5.  The  hostages  and  arms  have  been  surrendered 
that  we  may  not  be  regarded  in  the  light  of  enemies.  6.  We 
have  nothing  at  home  to  sustain  hunger.  7.  Let  us  restore 
the  towns  and  villages  which  we  have  burned,  lest  the  Ger- 
mans cross  into  the  Helvetian  territory.  8.  Let  us  cross 
the  river  to  *  supply  them  with  grain  ^more  easily. 

I.  Rel.  clause  of  purpose.  2.  quo  maturius.  3.  melius.  By  what 
conjunction  should  the  purpose  clause  be  introduced?  Cf.  sec.  121. 
4.  Latin,  "make  a  supply  of  grain  for  them."     5.  facilius. 


32  LATIN    COMl'OSrjJON 

LESSON    XXVIII 

125.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

imperio  potiri.  to  obtain  the  chief  power. 

ab  his  poenas  repetere.  to  inflict  piinishment  on  these 

(lit.  to  exact  punishment 
from  these). 

ex  usu  Galliae.  to  the  advantage  of  Gaul. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  I.   29,  30 

126.  CcX'sar  found  in  the  Helvetian  camp  records,  written 
in  Greek  characters,  which  showed^  how  many  could  bear 
arms.  The  sum  total  of  these  was  about  ninety-two  thousand. 
With  these  forces  they  had  left  their  homes  to  obtain  the 
supreme  power  over  entire  Gaul  and  to  hold  the  remaining 
states  as  vassals.  ^For  this  reason  the  chiefs  of  Gaul,  when 
they  came^  to  congratulate  Caesar,  said:  *"  Although  you 
made  war  upon  the  Helvetians  to  inflict  punishment  upon 
them  for  injuries  *'to  the  Romans,  yet  this  matter  has  hap- 
pened not  less  to  our  advantage  than  to  yours."" 

I.  dem6nstr5, -are.  2.  Quamobrem.  3.  Latin,  "had  come."  4.  Observe 
that  this  is  not  indir.  disc.     5.  Objective  genitive.     6.  tix5,  sc.  usu. 

LESSON   XXIX 

127.  Substantive  Clauses.  —  §  561,  562  (329);  B.  294;  H.  540; 
II-B.  238. 

128.  Substantive  Clauses  of  Purpose.  —  §  563,  564  (317.  3,  331);  B. 
294-296;  G.  546-550;  H.  564-567,  568.  2  (498,  499);  II-B.  502.  3,  4. 

129.  Among  the  common  verbs  that  regularly  take  the  sub- 
junctive in  the  object  clause  to  express  the  piurnose  or  will  of  the 
speaker  are  — 


DEPENDENT   MOODS  AND    TENSES  33 

censeo,  viove,  resolve.  negotium  do,  employ,  charge. 

hortor,  cohortor,  urge,  exhort.  operam  do,  take  pains. 

impero,  mand5,  o?'der,  command.  oro,  peto,  quaero,  rogo,  ask. 

metuo,  timeo,  vereor,  fear.  persuadeo,  persuade. 

moneo,  advise.  postulo,  demand. 

130.  Common  verbs  that  may  take  the  subjmictive  but  more 
usually  take  the  infinitive  are  — 

cupio,  desire.  statuo,  constituo,  determine. 

sino,  permit.  volo,  wish  (also  nolo,  malo). 

131.  The  following  verbs  take  the  infinitive:  — 
Conor,  attempt.  patior,  allow. 
iubeo,  order,  co7?tmatid.                     yeto,  forbid. 

132.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 
semel  atque  iterum.  again  and  again. 
auxilium  postulatum.  to  ask  aid. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  31  to  Sed  peius 
victoribus,  etc. 

133.  I.  We  ask  that  it  be  permitted  us  to  talk  to  you 
privately.  2.  They  fear  lest  what  they  have  said^  will  be 
reported.  3.  Let  us  strive  to  obtain  what  we  desire.  4.  The 
Arverni  wished^  the  Germans  to  be  called  in  (to  serve)  for 
pay.  5.  There  are  now  about  fifteen  thousand  Germans  in 
Gaul.  6.  But  we  fear  that  more  will  be  brought  across. 
7.  The  Haedui  could  not  be  prevented  from  contending  with 
these  again  and  again.  8.  Let  us  go  to  Rome  to  the  senate 
*to  ask  aid.  9.  We  fear  that  they  can  be  held  neither  by 
oath  nor  by  hostages. 

I.  Subjv.,  because  part  of  the  purpose  clause  (subjv.  by  attraction), 
cf.  sec.  293.     2.  cupio.     3.  Express  in  two  ways. 


34  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

LESSON    XXX 
Clauses  of  Purpose  —  Continued 

134.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 
paucis  annls.  in  a  few  years. 
nobilissimi  cuiusque  liberi.  children  of  all  the  noblest. 
idem  facere  quod.  to  do  tiic  same  as. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  31  from  Sed  peius 
victoribus 

135.  I.  They  feared  that  Ariovistus,  king  of  the  Germans, 
would  settle  in  their  ^  territory.  2.  He  could  not  be  prevented 
^from  occupying  the  best  part  of  entire  Gaul.  3.  He  com- 
manded^ them  to  prepare  a  place  for  the  Harudes.  4.  In 
a  few  years  the  Germans  will  try  ''to  drive  the  Gauls  from 
the  Gallic  territory.  5.  He  demanded  the  children  of  all 
the  noblest  as  hostages,  in  order  that  everything  might  be 
done  according  to  his^  will.  6.  Let  us  seek  another  home 
that  we  may  no  longer  be  under  his  control.  7.  Caesar 
prevented  a  larger  number  of  Germans  *from  crossing  the 
Rhine.  8.  We  must  do  the  same  as  the  Helvetians  did, 
®the  more  easily  to  defend  ourselves  from  the  violence  of 
Ariovistus. 

I.  sous.  2.  Latin,  "by  which  not,"  quin  with  the  subjv.  3.  Use  both 
impero  and  iubeo.  4.  Conor  takes  the  complementary  infin.,  other  verbs 
of  striving  and  effort  usually  the  subjv.  5.  quominus  or  ne  with  the 
subjv.    6.  What  conjunction  .-• 

LESSON    XXXI 

136.  The  Various  Ways  of  Expressing  Purpose.  —  §533(3'8);  B.  282. 
1,2;  338.  I.  c),  3 ;  339.  1,6;  340.  I  ;  337.  4  ;  G.  545,  546  ff.,  630,  428.  2  ; 
432,  435.  438.  N.;  H.  568  ff.,  626.5  ;  628,  633,  638.3  (497  ff..  542.I,IIL 
N.  2;  544.  i;   546,  549.  3);   H-B.  502.  2;  612.  I,  III;  618. 


DEPENDENT  MOODS  AND  TENSES      35 

137.  To  express  purpose  observe  — 

a.  That  the  tisual  way  is  by  ut  (neg.  ne). 

b.  That  the  relative  qui  is  preferred  when  the  persons  who  have 
the  purpose  to  perform  are  emphasized  (cf.  sec.  120). 

c.  That  quo  is  used  when  the  purpose  clause  contains  a  com- 
parative (cf.  sec.  121). 

d.  That  \S\&  gerund  atid gerundive  are  used  in  short  phrases. 

e.  That  the  siipine  is  used  only  with  verbs  of  motion  and  is 
not  common  even  with  them  (cf.  sec.  351  and  353). 

f.  That  the  future  participle  and  the  infinitive  (cf.  sec.  122) 
should  be  avoided. 

138.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

drationem  habere.  to  juake  a  speech. 

ne  in  occulto  quidem.  Jtot  even  in  secret. 

de  aliqu5  supplicium  siimere.  to  inflict  punishment  on  some 

one. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  32 

139.  I.  Diviciacus  was  present  Uo  make  a  speech.  2.  The 
cruelty  of  Ariovistus  prevented  the  Sequani  from  doing  the 
things  that  the  others  did.  3.  Who^  persuaded  them^  to 
receive  him  within  their  bounds  ?  4.  They  came  to  implore 
aid.  (Express  the  purpose  in  as  many  ways  as  possible.) 
5.  Caesar  urged*  the  Sequani  to  reply,  but  they  remained 
silent.  6.  Not  even  in  secret  did  they  complain,  lest  he 
inflict  severe  punishment  on  them.^  7.  Do  you  fear  that  I 
shall  be  unable  to  defend  the  Sequani  ? 

I.  Express  by  the  gerundive.  2.  quis.  3.  Not  accusative.  4.  hor- 
tor.     5.  Use  ipse. 


36  LAThN    COMPOSITION 

LESSON    XXXII 

140.  Review  the  rules  for  Sequence  of  Tenses,  Lessons  XXV- 
x.wi. 

141.  Review  the  following  idioms  and  phrases  :  — 
ab  his  poenas  repetere.  imperio  potiri. 

acriter  pugnatum  est.  impetum  facere  in  aliquem. 

ad  multam  noctem.  in  itinera. 

alteri  .  .  .  alteri.  ne  in  occult5  quidem. 

arma  tradere.  nobilissimi  ciiiusque  llberi. 

anxilium  postulatum.  orationem  habere. 

conversa  sTgna  inferre.  paucis  annis. 

de  aliquo  supplicium  sumere.  prima  nocte. 

ex  usu  Galliae.  se  recipere. 

idem  facere  quod.  semel  atque  iterum. 

For  Written  Translation —  Book  I.  ;^;^ 

142.  I  think  that  these  matters  ^should  be  attended  to  as 
soon  as  possible.  For  the  Germans  are  growing  accustomed 
to  cross  the  Rhine,  and  when  they  hold^  all  Gaul  in  servi- 
tude the  wild  and  barbarous  men  will  not  restrain  them- 
selves from  hastening  into  Italy.  In  addition  to  this,  it  is 
very  disgraceful  to  me  ^that  hostages  of  the  Hcedui,  our 
allies,  are  with  Ariovistus.  He  seems  to  me  very  arrogant.* 
Let  us,  therefore,  promise  our  allies  that  we  will  put  an  end 
to  the  outrages  of  Ariovistus,  and  let  us  encourage  them  °to 
be  of  good  courage. 

I.  Note  that  in  the  Latin  idiom  the  verb  is  impersonal.  2.  Fut.  perf. 
indie.  Cf.  sec.  71.  3.  An  infinitive  clause.  4.  Abl.  of  description, 
5.  Latin,  "  to  have  good  hope." 


DEPENDENT   MOODS  AND  TENSES  IJ 


LESSON    XXXIII 

143.  Clauses  of  Characteristic. — ■§  535.  a,  b  (320.  a,  b)\  B.  283.  i,  2  j 
G.  631.  1,2;  H.  591.  I  (503.  I);   H-B.  520,   521.  I.  a-c. 

144.  When  a  relative  clause  states  not  a  mere  fact  about  the 
antecedent  (of.  sec.  118),  but  defines  it  as  having  a  certain  quality 
or  characteristic,  the  subjunctive  is  used  and  we  have  a  relative 
clause  of  characteristic.  This  construction  is  especially  common 
when  the  antecedent  is  indefinite  or  general  and  needs  to  be 
defined.     Compare  the  two  sentences  — 

a.  The  soldier  who  is  fleeing  is  afraid. 

b.  No  one  who  flees  is  brave. 

In  a  the  relative  clause  merely  states  the  fact  that  the  soldier 
is  fleeing ;  in  b  the  thought  is  "  No  one  of  such  a  character  that 
he  flees  is  brave."     Hence  the  Latin:  — 

a.  Miles  qui  fugit  est  timidus. 

b.  Nemo  qui  fugiat  est  fortis. 

145.  Among  the  indefinite  and  general  expressions  followed  by 

the  relative  clause  oi  characteristic  are  the  following :  — 

there  are  some  "1       ,  ,       _ 

\  who  =  sunt  qui. 
there  are  those] 

who  is  there  who  =  quis  est  qui. 

there  is  no  one  who  =  nemo  est  qui. 

there  are  none  who  =  nuUi  sunt  qui. 

he  is  the  only  one  who  =  J  I  est  qui, 

tsolusj 

the  one  to,  such  a  man  as  to  =  is  qui. 

146.  A  test  for  the  relative  clause  of  characteristic  is  that  the 
relative  may  be  translated  by  the  words  of  such  a  character  that. 

147.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

aliquid  ab  aliqu5  postulare.  to  demand  something  fro}n  some 

one. 
gratiam  referre.  to  7)iake  a  grateful  return. 

iniiirias  neglegere.  to  overlook  injuries. 


38 


LATIN    COMPOSITION 


For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  34*35 
148.  I.  There  were  some  who  wished  to  confer  with 
Ariovislus  about  the  supreme  welfare.^  2.  Ariovistus  ^is 
not  the  man  to  come  to  Caisar.  3.  Ariovistus  did  not  dare 
to  come  ^into  the  parts  of  Gaul  that  Casar  possessed. 
4.  Ariovistus  did  not  dare  to  come  into  such  parts  of  Gaul 
as  Cffisar  possessed.  5.  I  am  not  the  only  one  to  whom  it 
seems  strange.  6.  *Who  is  there  that  will  carry  this  reply 
back  to  Caesar  ?  7.  ^I  am  not  the  man  to  overlook  the  wrongs 
of  the  Haedui.  8.  There  is  no  one  that  dares  to  demand 
these  things  of  him.  9.  There  are  some  who  think  that  the 
general  welfare  should  be  discussed.  10.  Is  there  no  one 
to  make  a  grateful  return  to  the  Roman  people  ? 

I.  res.  2.  nonisest.  3.  The  only  difference  between  this  clause  and 
the  corresponding  one  in  the  next  sentence  is  in  the  mood  of  the  verb 
possessed.  The  indie,  in  the  former  merely  states  the  fact ;  the  subjv.  in 
the  latter  characterizes  the  parts  of  Gaul  into  which  Ariovistus  did  not 
dare  to  come  as  belonging  to  Caesar.  4.  quis  est  qui,  i.e.  who  is  of  such 
a  character  that.     5.  Cf.  sentence  2. 


*  LESSON  XXXIV 

149.  Relative  Clauses  after  dignus,  indl^nus,  etc  —  §  535/(320./); 
B.  282.  3  ;  G.  631.  I ;  H.  591.  5-7  (503.  II)  ;  H-B.  513.  3. 

150.  Compare  the  Latin  and  English  idioms  in  the  following 
sentence :  — 

'  worthy 

unworthy 

suitable 

fit 
'  digni 

indigni 

idonei 

apti 


These  books  are. 


Hi  libri  sunt 


.  to  be  read. 


>  qui  legantur. 


DEPENDENT  MOODS  AND  TENSES 


39 


Such  sentences  sometimes  assume  a  more  colloquial  form  in 
English,  as,  these  books  are  worth  reading,  Jit  to  read,  deserve 
to  be  read,  etc. 

This  construction  of  the  subjunctive  is  closely  related  to  char- 
acteristic. 

151.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

su6  iiire  uti.  to  exercise  one's  rights. 

alicui  bellum  inferre.  to  make  war  tepon  so7ne  one. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  36 

152.  I.  The  reply  of  Ariovistus  was  ^ worth  hearing. 
2.  What  state  is  there  that  does  not  govern  the  conquered 
after  its  own  will  ?  3.  You  are  not  a  suitable  person  to  pre- 
scribe to  me  how  I  shall  exercise  my  rights.  4.  You  are 
the  one,  Caesar,  that  is  making  my  revenues  less.  5.  The 
conquered  ^do  not  deserve  to  exercise  rights  of  their  own. 
6.  Among  the  soldiers  of  Ariovistus  there  were  some  that 
had  not  entered  a  house  for  fourteen  years.  7.  ^ Don't 
make  war  upon  the  Haedui.  8.  Is  there  *any  one,  Ariovistus, 
that  can  contend  with  you  without  his  own  destruction.? 

I.  Latin,  "  worthy  which  should  be  heard."  2.  Latin,  "  are  unworthy 
who  should."  3.  For  prohibitions,  cf.  sec.  99.  4.  quisquam,  followed 
here  by  a  relative  clause  of  characteristic. 

LESSON    XXXV 

153.  Pure  and  Relative  Clauses  of  Result.  — §  537.  \,z.a\  538  (319. 
i,2.R.(z);  B.  284.  1,2;  G.  552,  631;  H.  570,  591  (500.  I,  II);  H-B. 
521.  2. 

154.  Distinguish  carefully  between  the  English  expression  of 
purpose  and  of  result.     Compare  — 

a.  He  fled  quickly  to  save  his  life. 

b.  He  fled  so  quickly  that  he  saved  his  life. 


40  LMIN    COMPOSITION 

a  expresses  a  purpose,  b  a  result.  In  Latin  tlic  constructions  of 
purpose  and  result  are  precisely  alike  except  that  the  negative  in 
a  purpose  clause  is  ne,  but  in  a  result  clause  it  is  non.* 

155.  Frequently  demonstrative  words,  meaning  so  or  stic]i^  like 
ita,  sic,  tam,  talis,  tantus,  ade5,  in  the  main  clause  give  warning 
that  a  result  clause  is  to  follow.  Cf.  text,  Book  I.  38,  reliquum 
spatium  .  .  .  mons  continet  ...  ita  ut,  etc. 

156.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

quam  celerrime.  as  quickly  as  possible. 

se  coniungere  cum.  to  unite  with. 

ducere  bellum.  to  prolong  the  war. 

ex  utraque  parte.  on  each  side. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  37,  38 

157.  I.  The  Haedui  came  ^to  complain.  2.  The  Suevi 
had  encamped  near  the  bank  of  the  river  ^that  they  might 
cross  more  easily.  3.  Caesar  was  so  moved  by  these  reports^ 
that  he  hastened  as  quickly  as  possible.  4.  Caesar  feared 
that  the  new  force  of  the  Suevi  would  unite  with  the  old 
forces  of  Ariovistus.  5.  Ariovistus  will  hasten  to  seize 
Vesontio.  6.  I  must  take  the  greatest  precautions  that  this 
does  not  happen.  7.  Vesontio  is  *a  town  such  that  it  offers 
a  great  opportunity  for  prolonging  a  war.  8.  It  is  so  forti- 
fied by  nature  that  a  river  surrounds  almost  the  entire  town. 
9.  A  mountain  filled  up  the  remaining  space,  so  that  the 
banks  of  the  river  touched  the  mountain  on  each  side. 

I.  Not  infin.  2.  What  conjunction?  Cf.  sec.  121.  3.  Latin,  ''things." 
4.  id  oppidum  quod,  cf.  sec.  146. 

*  See  sec.  114  for  a  possible  diflference  in  the  sequence  of  tenses. 


DEPENDENT   MOODS  AND   TENSES  41 


LESSON    XXXVI 

158.  miOMS   AND  PHRASES 

signa  ferre.  to  march  ^  advance  (lit.  to  bear 

the  standards^. 

non  mediocriter.  not  a  little. 

alius  alia  causa  inlata.  one  on  one  pretext,  another  on 

another. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  I.  39 

159.  Caesar  hastened  towards  Vesontio  by  such  long 
marches  that  he  seized  the  town  before  the  arrival  of  Ario- 
vistus.  While  he  ^  was  tarrying  there  a  tew  days,  the  army 
heard  so^  many  rumors^  about  the  incredible  valor  and  huge 
size  of  the  Germans,  that  great  fear  seized  the  soldiers  and 
disturbed  their  hearts  not  a  little.  Not  even  the  tribunes  of 
the  soldiers  could  compose  their  features ;  but  one  on  one 
pretext,  another  on  another,  ^sought  permission  to  depart. 
There  were  some  who  feared  that  the  soldiers  would  not 
obey  the  command  when  Caesar  should  order  them  to  break 
camp  and  march. 

I.  Not  past  in  Latin.  Cf.  sec.  54,  11.  2.  j-(7  =  tam  when  modifying  an 
adjective  or  adverb ;  usually  ita  or  sic  when  modifying  a  verb.  3.  Latin, 
"  voices."     4.  Latin,  "  asked  that  it  might  be  permitted  them." 

LESSON    XXXVII 

160.  Substantive  Clauses  of  Result.  —  §  568-571  (332.  a.  i,  2);  B.  297; 
G.  553;  11.571  (501);  H-B.  521.3.  «),^). 

161.  Substantive  Clauses  of  Result  may  be  — 

a.  Subject. 

b.  Object. 

c.  Appositive  (with  neuter  pronoun). 


42  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

d.    I'redicate  nominative  after  mos  est  {it  is  a  custom')  and  sim- 
ilar expressions. 

162.  Common  verbs  and  phrases  taking  an  utclause  of  result 
as  subject  or  object  are  — 
accedit, 


\  it  is 


,,..       ^  ..  is  added. 
additur, 

accidit,  contingit,  evenit,  fit,  it  happens. 

facere,  efficere,  to  cause,  effect,  acco?/iplis/i,  bring  about. 

necesse  est,  it  is  necessary. 

relinquitur,  reliquum  est,  restat,  //  retnaitis. 

sequitur,  consequitur,  it  follows. 

163.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

patrum  nostrorum  memoria.  within    the    memory    of   our 

fathers. 
de  virtiite  desperate.  to  despair  of  valor. 

proxima  nocte.  the  next  night. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  40 

164.  I.  I  fear  that  Ariovistus  will  not  seek  the  friend- 
ship of  Caesar.  2.  Rage  and  madness  caused^  him  to  make 
war  upon  them.  3.  ^Can  it  be  that  you  despair  of  your 
valor  or  of  my  care.''  4.  'An  added  fact  is  that  Marius 
conquered  these  same  Germans  within  the  memory  of  our 
fathers.  5.  ^From  which  it  follows  that  they  are  not  a 
match  for  our  army.  6.  Ariovistus  is  a  general  who  con- 
quers by  stratagem  more  than  by  valor.  7.  There  were 
some  who  acted  arrogantly.  8.  Thus  it  happened  that  he 
moved  the  camp  the  next  night.  9.  Csesar  ®had  such  con- 
fidence in  the  tenth  legion  that  he  said  he  would  go  with 
it  alone. 

I.  efficio.  2.  potestne  fieri  with  a  subject  clause  of  result.  3.  Latin, 
"it  is  added  that."     4.  ex  quo.     5.  Latin,  "so  trusted  to." 


DEPENDENT   MOODS  AND   TENSES  .43 

LESSON   XXXVIII 

X65.  Clauses  introduced  by  qtiin  and  quominus.  —  §  558,  559  (319.  d 
332.  g.  R.,  N.  2) ;  B.  284.  3  ;  295.  3  ;  298  ;  G.  549,  554,  555,  556 ;  H.  568.  8 
594.  II;  595,  596  (504,  505.  I.  i;  II);  H-B.  502.  3.  b)  ;  519.4-^) 
521.  I,  2,  3.  b). 

166.  Verbs  of  Hindering  and  Opposing  take  — 

a.  When  affirmative  the  subjunctive  with  ne  or  quominus. 

b.  When  negatived  the  subjunctive  with  quin. 
Note.  —  Prohibeo  more  commonly  takes  the  infinitive. 

167.  The  constructions  after  dubito  are  as  follows :  — 

a.  Dubit5  in  the  sense  of  hesitate  takes  the  infinitive :  — 
Germani  transire  dubitant,  the  Germans  hesitate  to  cross. 

b.  Non  dubito,  /  do  not  doubt ^  and  similar  negative  expressions 
of  doubt  take  the  subjunctive  with  quin  :  — 

Non  dubito  quin  Germani  transeant,  /  do  not  doubt  that  the 
Germans  will  cross. 

c.  Dubito,  I  doubt.,  is  followed  by  an  indirect  question  (of.  sec.  217) : 
Dubito  num  Germani  transeant,  /  doubt  whether  the  Germans 

are  crossing. 

168.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 
gratias  agere.  to  thank. 

summa  belli.  the  supreme  control  of  the  war. 

alicui  maximam  fidem  habere.  to  have  the  greatest  confidence 

in  some  one. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  41 

169.  I.  There  is  no  doubt  that  the  feelings^  of  all  were 
changed.  2.  The  tenth  legion  did  not  hesitate  to  thank 
him,  3.  There  was  no  doubt  that  this  legion  was  well  pre- 
pared for  carrying  on  war.     4.  The  remaining  legions  could 


44-  LATIN  coMrosriTOiN 

not  be  prevented'  from  apologizing  to  Caesar.  5.  We  do 
not  doubt  that  tlie  judgment  concerning  the  supreme  con- 
trol of  the  war  belongs  to  the  general.  6.  They  feared  that 
Caesar  would  not  accept  their  apology.  7.  He  commanded* 
Diviciacus  to  reconnoiter  the  route,  8.  It  happened  that 
Caisar  had  the  greatest  confidence  in  him.  9.  The  coward- 
ice of  the  soldiers  did  not  prevent  Cassar  from  setting  out. 
10.  I  doubt  whether  the  scouts  will  inform  Caesar. 

I.  Latin,  "minds."  2.  prohibeo.  3.  Express  both  with  imperd  and 
with  iubed. 

LESSON   XXXIX 

General  Review  of  Purpose  and  Result 

170.  Review  the  Rules  of  Syntax,  Lessons  xxvil-xxxvill. 

171.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

magnam  in  spem  venire.  to  be  very  hopepd  (lit.  to  come 

itito  great  hope') . 
ultro  citroque.  back  atid forth. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  42 

172.  I.  Ariovistus  sent  ambassadors  to  Caesar  Ho  demand 
a  conference.  2.  Caesar  did  not  doubt  that  Ariovistus  was 
now  returning  to  reason.  3.  I  am  very  hopeful  that  the 
result  will  be  that  he  will  cease  from  his  obstinacy.  4.  It 
happened  that  ambassadors  were  sent  back  and  forth  fre- 
quently. 5.  Caesar,  I  demand  that  you  bring  no  infantry 
to  the  conference.  6.  I  fear  that  I  shall  be  surrounded. 
7.  Fear  of  an  ambush  did  not  prevent^  Ariovistus  from 
coming  to  the  conference.  8.  I  will  mount  the  tenth  legion 
on  horses,^  that  I  may  go  more  safely.* 

I.  Express  in  as  many  ways  as  possible.  2.  deterred.  3.  The  dative, 
or  in  with  the  accusative.  4.  tutius.  What  conjunction  is  used  when 
the  purpose  clause  contains  a  comparative  ? 


DEPENDENT   MOODS  AND   TENSES  45 

LESSON    XL 

173.  Review  the  following  idioms  and  phrases:  — 
alJcui  bellum  Inferre.  magnam  inspem  venire, 
alicui  maximam  fidem  habere.          non  mediocriter. 

aliquid  ab  aliquo  postulare.  patrum  nostrorum  memoria. 

alius  alia  causa  inlata.  proxima  nocte. 

de  virtiite  desperare.  quam  celerrime. 

ducere  bellum.  se  coniungere  cum. 

ex  utraque  parte.  signa  ferre. 

gratiam  referre.  summa  belli. 

gratias  agere.  suo  iure  uti. 

iniurias  neglegere.  ultro  citroque. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  I.  43 

174.  Both  Caesar  and  Ariovistus  came  to  a  certain^  mound 
to  hold  a  conference.  The  German  and  Roman  cavalry 
had  been  so  arranged  that  they  were  distant  two  hundred 
paces  from  the  mound.  The  Roman  people  have  this  cus- 
tom, that  they  do  not  allow  influence  and  rank  to  be  taken 
from  those  that  have  sought  their  friendship;  -and  so  Cassar 
demanded  from  Ariovistus  that  he  should  not  make  war 
upon  the  Haedui  nor  their  allies.  For  it  happened  that 
there  were  ancient  and  just  reasons  for  ^intimate  relations 
between  the  Romans  and  the  Haedui. 

I.  quidam.     2.  itaque.     3.  "  intimate  relations,"  translate  by  one  word. 


46 


LATIN   COMPOSITION 


LESSON    XLI 

175.  Causal  Clauses  introduced  by  quod,  quia,  guottiam,  and  quando. 
-§54o..i(3:;i.  N.  3);  13.265,266;  G.  sagff.;  11.566(510);  H-B.  555, 
535.  2.  <;,^ 

176. 


I.  quod  and  quia. 


a.  With  the  indicative  to  assign 
a  reason  positively  on  the 
writer's  or  speaker's  authority. 

b.  With  the  subjunctive  to  assign 
a  reason  doubtfully  on  an- 
other's authority. 

2.  quoniam  and  quando,  with  the  indicative. 

3.  cum  (since),  with  the  subjunctive. 

4.  qui,  with  the  subjunctive. 
N.B.  The  subjunctive  with  quia  is  rare. 


Causal  Clauses 
are  expressed  by 


177. 
imperitus  rerum. 
pro  hoste  habere, 
atixilio  populi  Romani  uti 


IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 


ignora?it  of  affairs. 

to  regard  as  an  enemy. 

to  use  the  help  of  the  Romans. 


For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  44 

178.  I.  I  crossed  the  Rhine  because  the  Gauls  invited 
me.  2.  The  Germans  left  home  because  they  had  dwelling- 
places  in  Gaul.  3.  It  is  a  right  of  war  that  victors  impose 
a  tribute  on  the  conquered.  4.  Ariovistus  will  make  war 
upon  the  Gauls  because  they  have  made  war  upon  him. 
5.  Kings  sought  the  friendship  of  the  Roman  people,  be- 
cause it  was  a  protection  to  them.  6.  Ariovistus  was  not 
so  ignorant  of  affairs  as  not  to  know  this.  7.  Ariovistus 
regarded  Caesar  as  an  enemy  because  he  did  not  surren- 
der Gaul  to  him.  8.  You  are  unjust  because  you  keep 
an  army  in  Gaul  to  crush  me.  9.  The  Haedui  wished  to 
use  the  help  of  the  Romans  because  they  had  been  called 
friends  by  the  senate. 


DEPENDENT   MOODS  AND    TENSES  47 

N.B.  Sentences  2,  4,  5,  7,  9,  should  be  given  both  with  the  indie,  as 
expressing  the  speaker's  reason,  and  willi  the  subjv.,  as  expressing  the 
reason  of  another. 

LESSON   XLII 

179.  Causal  Clauses  introduced  by  (^w/«  and^«i".  —  §  540.  c,d\  549, 
535.  ^  (320. /f ;  321.  c;  326);  B.  286.  2;  283.3.3;  G.  586,  626;  H.  592, 
598,  599  (517);  H-B.  523,  526,  527. 

180.  Cum  causal  {since^  is  a  variety  of  cum  temporal  (wheii) 
and  should  be  used  when  since  has  also  the  idea  of  when  {the  cir- 
cujnstances  beitig  such)  so  that  the  conjunction  may  be  translated 
by  either  word  without  changing  the  essential  meaning  of  the  sen- 
tence. Cum  causal  is  never  used  when  the  reason  is  regarded  as 
an  admitted  fact. 

181.  Qui  causal  is  merely  a  variety  of  the  relative  clause  of  char- 
acteristic (cf.  sec.  144),  the  quality  expressed  by  the  subjunctive 
being  regarded  as  the  cause  for  the  action  of  the  main  verb.  For 
example,  in  the  sentence  a  general  who  conquers  his  enemies  is 
praised,  the  relative  clause  who  conquers  his  etietnies  characterizes 
a  general  and  also  gives  the  reason  for  his  being  praised,  hence 
the  Latin  :  imperator  qui  hostis  vincat  laudatur. 

182.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 
loquendi  finem  facere.  to  cease  speaking. 
sine  iill5  periculo.  without  any  danger. 

iudicio  senatus.  in  the  Judgtnent  of  the  senate. 

Gallia  Romanis  interdicere.  to   order   the   Romans   out   of 

Gaul. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  T.  45,  46 

183.  I.  It  is  the  custom  of  the  Roman  people  not  ^to 
desert  their  deserving  allies.  2.  I  judge  that  Gaul  belongs 
rather  to  the  Roman  people,  since  they  have  conquered  it. 
3.  In  the  judgment  of  the  senate,  there  is  no  doubt  that 
Gaul  ought  to  be  free.     4.  Since  the  horsemen  were  drawing 


48  LATIN    COMPOSniON 

nearer  the  mound,  Civs.ir  ceased  speaking;.  5.  I  command 
you  not  to  throw  back  any  weapons  at  all.  6.  A  battle 
wiUi  the  cavalry  will  be  without  danger  to  you  "who  are  of 
the  chosen  legion.  7.  There  ought  to  be  no  ground  for 
saying  that  the  Gerrnans  were  betrayed.  8.  Since  Ariovis- 
tus  has  ordered  the  Romans  out  of  all  Gaul,  let  us  attack 
him.  9.  Since  P'abius  had  not  reduced  Gaul  to  a  province, 
it  used  its  own  laws. 

I.  Not  infin.     2.  A  relative  clause  of  cause. 

LESSON    XLIII 

184.  Temporal  clauses  may  be  cla.<isified  as  follows  :  — 

1.  Clauses  with  postquam,  ubi,  ut,  simul  «n  otr.,  with  the  indica- 
tive (usually  perfect). 

2.  Clauses  with  cum  with  the  indic3*^«ue  ^r  subjunctive. 

3.  Clauses  with  antequam  or  priusauam  witla  the  indicative  or 
subjunctive. 

4.  Clauses  with  dum,  donee,  or  quoad  with  the  indicative  or 
subjunctive. 

N.B.  Observe  that  only  with  the  first  of  these  varieties  is  the 
indicative  always  used. 

185.  In  general  it  may  be  stated  that  expressions  of  pjire  time 
are  in  the  indicative.  The  subjunctive  is  used  when  the  time  rela- 
tion is  modified  by  some  other  idea,  as  cause,  concession,  doubt., 
purpose,  and  the  like. 

186.  Temporal  Clauses  introduced  by  fostquam,  ut,  ubi,  simul  ac,  ut 
prltnum,  etc. —  §  543.  a  {323,  324);  B.  2S7  ;  G.  561  ff. ;  H.  602  (518); 
H-B.  550,  557,  558. 

187.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

de  rebus  agere.  to  talk  or  deliberate  about  things. 

causa  conloquendi.  an  occasion  for  a  conference. 

peccandi  Germanis  causa  n5n  est.      the  Germans  have  no  ground 

for  committing  an  outrage- 


DEPENDENT   MOODS  AND   TENSES  49 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  47 

188.  I.  After  Caesar  had  returned  to  camp,  Ariovistus 
sent  ambassadors  to  him.  2.  Since  we  have  begun  to  talk 
about  these  things,  let  us  finish  them,  3.  I  want  you  Ho 
name  a  day  for  a  conference  a  second  time.  4.  Since 
Caesar^  did  not  see  an  occasion  for  a  conference,  he  sent  an 
ambassador  to  him.  5.  The  Germans  cannot  be  restrained 
from  hurling  their  weapons  against  their  enemies.  6.  He 
sent  Valerius  Procillus,  ^in  (respect  to)  whom  the  Germans 
had  no  ground  for  committing  an  outrage.  7.  As  soon  as 
he  tried  to  speak,  Ariovistus  threw  him  into  chains.  8.  After 
you  have  learned  what  Ariovistus  says,  report  to  me.  9.  As 
soon  as  he  saw  them  in  camp,  he  shouted. 

I.  Not  infin.  2.  Place  first.  Cf.  sec.  18.  3.  A  relative  clause  of 
cause.     Cf.  sees.  118,  181. 

LESSON   XLIV 

189.  IDIOMS   AND  PHRASES 

dies  continues  quinque.  for  Jive  days  in  succession. 

facultatem  pugnandi  facere.  to  give  an  opportutiity  for  fight- 

ing. 
castrls  se  tenere.  to  keep  one's  self  in  camp. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  I.  48,  49 

190.  After  the  Germans  had  made  a  camp  two  miles 
beyond  him,  Caesar,  that  he  might  not  be  cut  off  from  grain 
and  supplies,  led  his  troops  out  before  the  camp  five  days 
in  succession  to  give  Ariovistus  an  opportunity  for  fighting. 
But  since  the  king  Vitpt  himself  in  camp,  Caesar  thought  that 
^he  ought  to  advance  further.  When  Ariovistus^  perceived 
that  Caesar  was  moving  his  camp  forward,  he  sent  sixteen 


50  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

thousand  lii::ht-armc'd  infantry  with  all  the  cavalry,  with  this 
intention,  that  ho  might  terrify  our  forces. 

I.  Second  periphrastic  conjugation,  used  impersonally  in  this  case 
because  the  verb  is  intransitive.  The  subject  "he,"  if  expressed,  would 
be  the  dative  of  apparent  agent,  but  may  be  omitted.  The  dative  of 
apparent  agent  is  often  omitted  when  it  is  a  personal  pronoun.  2.  Place 
first.     Cf.  sec.  18. 

LESSON   XLV 

191.  Temporal  Clauses  introduced  by  cum.  —  §  545,  546.  N.  3  (325); 
B.  2SS,  2S9;  G.  578-585;  H.  600,601  (521);  H-B.  524,  525,  550.  a;  551. 

192.  The  rules  for  cum  temporal  may  be  summarized  in  the 
general  statement  that  in  temporal  clauses  with  cum  the  indicative 
is  used  of  prese?it  and  future  time  ;  and  the  subjunctive  of  past 
time,  except  when  a  date  is  given  or  tlie  time  at  which  the  action 
of  the  main  verb  occurred  is  defined  (cf.  A.  &  G.  §  546.  n.  3). 

a.  Cum  temporal  with  a  past  indicative  is  not  of  frequent  occur- 
rence ;  and  when  so  found  cum  is  generally  preceded  by  tum,  as,  — 
Turn  cum  multi  ceciderant  hostes  fugenint,  at  that  time  when 
7nany  had falleji,  the  enemy  Jled. 

193.  When  cum  means  whenever  it  expresses  customary  or 
recurrent  action  and  introduces  a  general  condition  (cf.  sec.  240). 
In  this  use  cum  is  usually  followed  by  the  perfect  or  pluperfect 
indicative. 

194.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

aciem  instruere.  to  draw  up  the  line  of  battle. 

ad  speciem  uti.  to  use  for  show. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  50,  51 

195.  I.  When  he  had  marched  a  short  distance  from  the 
larger  camp,  he  drew  up  his  line  of  battle.  2.  He  led  his 
army  back  into  camp  because  the  enemy  did  not  give^  him 
an   opportunity  for   fighting.     3.   He   will   send   troops   '^to 


DEPENDENT   MOODS  AND   TENSES 


5' 


storm  the  camp.  4.  When  I  inquired  from  the  matrons,  they 
spoke  as  follows.  5.  This  is  a  custom  among  the  Germans, 
that  they  do  not  fight  before  the  new  moon.  6.  Since  you 
wish  to  use  the  auxiliaries  for  show,  station  them  before  the 
camp.  7.  When  Caesar  approached  ^up  to  the  very  camp, 
they  led  out  their  forces.  8.  When  they  had  surrounded  the 
line  with  carts,  they  put  the  women  in*  them. 

I.  Indie,  or  subjv.  or  either?  Cf.  sec.  176.  2.  Express  in  as  many 
ways  as  possible.  Cf.  sec.  137.  3.  Latin,  "even  to  the  camp."  4.  in 
with  the  accusative,  or  the  adv.  eo. 


*  LESSON   XLVI 

196.  Temporal  Clauses  introduced  by  antequam  and  priusquam. — 
§  551  (327);  B.  291,292;  G.  574-577;  H.  605  (520);  H-B.  507.  4.  a-d; 
550.  ^j  561.571- 

197.  The  constructions  after  antequam  and  priusquam  are  sum- 
marized in  the  following:  table  :  — 


'    I.  Present 
Future 

and~ 

Indicative. 

Tenses. 

J 

' 

'     The  Perfect  Indica- 

a. Indicative.     - 

tive  is  used  to  state  an 

Antequam 

and 
Priusquam 

II.  Past 
Tenses. 

h.   Subjunctive." 

actual  occurrence. 
■     The  Imperfect  Sub- 
junctive (rarely  the  Plu- 
perfect) is  used  to  denote 
purpose  or  tendency,  in 
past  time  or  when  the 
action  that  it  denotes 

. 

. 

_  did  not  take  place. 

198.  Antequam  and  priusquam  consist  each  of  two  parts  often 
written  separately  and  sometimes  separated  by  other  words  :  ante 
.  .  .  quam,  prius  .  .  .  quam.  Priusquam  is  commoner  in  classic 
prose  than  antequam. 


52  LATIN    COMPOS IITON 

199.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

a  dextro  cornu.  on  (he  right  wing. 

pugnatum  est.  the  battle  ruas  fought,  there  was 

fighting. 
in  aliquem  incidere.  to  fall  in  with  some  one. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  I.  52,  53 

200.  I.  Before  he  joined  battle,  Caesar  put  a  legatus  in 
command  of  each  legion.  2.  The  enemy  ran  forward 
before  we  could  hurl  our  spears.  3.  Crassus  sent  the  third 
line  as  aid,  when  we  were  hard  pressed  on  the  right  wing. 
4.  There  was  sharp  fighting  on  the  left  wing.  5.  We  did 
not  cease  fleeing  before  we  came  to  the  Rhine.  6.  After 
the  enemy  had  fled,  Procillus  and  Metius  were  rescued  from 
their  hands.  7.  Ariovistus  found  a  skiff  before  he  could 
be  captured.  8.  When  I  was  being  dragged  along  by  my 
guards,  I  fell  in  with  Caesar,  9.  The  Germans  consulted 
the  lots  about  me  three  times  before  the  Romans  found  me. 

LESSON    XLVII 

201.  Temporal  Clauses  introduced  by  dum,  donee,  and  quoad.  —  §  553- 
556  {328);  B.  293;  G.  571,  572;  H.  603  {519);  H-B.  507.5;  550. /5; 
559.  560- 

202.  The  constructions  after  dum,  donee,  quoad,  are  as  follows  :  — 
a.  Perfect    Indicative    to   denote  an   actual 

fact  in  past  time. 
'  \i\     ^  ^-   Present  or  Imperfect  Subjunctive  in  tem- 
poral clauses  implying  purpose  or  expect- 
ancy. 


Dum,  donee 
quoad. 


{until) 


dum,  donee,  quoad  1  ..    ..      . 

\         indicative. 
(as  long  as)       J 


dum        f  Present  Indicative  (Historical  Present)  to  de- 
{while)      1^      note  continued  action  in  past  time. 
N.B.    Dum  (until)  with  a  past  indicative  is  rare. 


DEPENDENT   MOODS  AND   TENSES  53 

203.  IDIOMS   AND  PHRASES 
Caesarem  certiorem  facere.  to  inform  CcEsar. 
moleste  ferre.                                       to  take  {it)  ill. 

dum  haec  geruntur.  while  this  -was  going  on. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  II.   i,  2 

204.  I.  Caesar  remained  in  Hither  Gaul,  until  rumors  were 
brought  to  him.  2.  While  the  Belgae  were  giving  hostages 
to  each  other,  Labienus  informed  Csesar.  3.  We  fear  that 
the  Roman  army  will  be  led  against  us.  4.  Do  not  take 
it  ill  that  the  Romans  are  wintering  in  Gaul.  5.  We  shall 
have  opportunities  for  hiring  men  until  they  seize  the  sov- 
ereignty. 6.  Cassar  set  out  after  he  had  enrolled  two  new 
legions.  7.  Caesar  waited^  until  there  began  to  be  an  abun- 
dance of  fodder.  8.  Caesar  moved  his  camp  while  the  Belgae 
were  collecting  their  forces.  9.  While  this  was  going  on, 
he  arrived  at  the  territory  of  the  Belgae. 

I.  exspectd. 

LESSON   XLVIII 

205.  IDIOMS   AND  PHRASES 

de  improviso.  tinexpectedly. 

manus  cogere.  to  assemble  forces. 

non  deterreri  quin.  not  to  be  prevented  from. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  II.  3 

206.  While  the  Belgae  were  assembling  their  forces,  Caesar 
unexpectedly  arrived  at  their  borders.  The  Remi,  who 
were  the  ^  only  ones  that  had  not  conspired  against  the 
Romans,  when  they  heard  ^  of  Ccesar's  arrival  sent  ambas- 
sadors to  him  and  assisted  (him)  with  grain  and  other  sup- 
plies.    But  all  the  rest  of  the  Belgai  were  in  arms,  and  not 


54  LATIN   COMPOSITION 

even  the  Germans  who  dwell  on  tliis  side  of  the  Rhine  could 
be  prevented  from  ''making  common  cause  with  these. 

I.  solus,  followed  by  a  relative  clause  of  characteristic.  Cf.  sec.  145. 
2.  Latin,  "had  heard."  3.  Translate  " making  common  cause "  by  one 
word. 

*  LESSON   XLIX 

207.  Substantive  Clauses  introduced  by  quod.  —  §  572  (333);  B.  299; 
G.  524,  525  ;  II.  5SS.  3  (540.  IV) ;  II-B.  552. 

208.  The  substantive  clause  with  quod  is  usually  used  as  sub- 
ject or  in  apposition  with  a  neuter  pronoun  (cf.  examples  in  the 
grammar).  It  should  be  remembered  that  an  ut-clause  or  an 
infinitive  with  subject  accusative  are  possible  equivalents  and  are 
much  more  common. 

209.  English  clauses  introduced  by  whereas  or  as  to  the  fact  that 
are  rendered  in  Latin  by  a  quod-clause  with  the  indicative.  The 
whole  clause  may  be  regarded  as  an  accusative  of  specification. 

210.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

quid  in  bello  possunt  ?  what  is  their  ability  in  war  ? 

ab  Germanis  orti.  of  German  descent  (lit.  sprung 

from  the  Germans'). 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  II.  4 

211.  I.  Let  us  see  what  their  ability  is  in  war.  2.  As 
regards  the  fact  that  the  Belgians  assume  great  authority  in 
military  affairs,  they  are  the  only  ones  ^that  drove  out  the 
Germans.  3.  This  seems  sure,*  that  the  Belgians  are  of 
German  descent.  4.  *It  was  well  for  Cassar  that  the  Remi 
had  found  out  everything.  5.  As  regards  the  fact  that  the 
Bellovaci  demanded  the  control  of  the  entire  war,  they  had 
promised  the  greatest  number  of  men.  6.  '*To  this  was  added 
the  fact  that  they  excelled  in  valor.     7.  King  Galba  was  of 


DEPENDENT  MOODS  AND  TENSES      55 

such^  wisdom  that  the  supreme  control  of  the  entire  war  was 
given  to  him.  8.  It  seems  w^onderful®  that  all  these  thou- 
sands of  Belgians  did  not  conquer  Caisar. 

I.  Cf.  sec.  145.  2.  certus, -a, -um.  3.  Bene  Caesarl  accidit.  4.  Hue 
accedebat  quod.     5.  Latin,  "  so  great."     6.  mirabilis, -e. 

LESSON    L 

212.  Direct  Questions.  —  §330-337  (210,211,212);  B.  162;  G.  450- 
459, 471 ;  H.  378-3S0  (351-353);  H-B.  231-234. 

213.  The  usual  interrogatives  in  a  double  question  are  — 

utrum~l 

I  ran  {or,  with  verb). 

I  lannon  {or  not,  regularly  without  verb). 

N.B.  utrum  and  -ne  do  not  appear  in  the  English  translation. 

214.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

ad  diem  fieri.  to  be  done  to  the  day. 

castra  ponere.  to  pitch  camp. 

pons  in  fliimine.  a  bridge  over  a  river. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  II.  5,  6 

215.  I.  Did  Cagsar  command  hostages  to  be  brought  to 
him  ?  ^He  did.  2.  Will  not  all  these  things  be  done  to  the 
day?  ^ They  will.  3.  Can  this  be  done  or  not?  It  can. 
4.  He  pitched  camp  after  he  had  led  the  army  across  the 
Axona.  5.  There  is  no  bridge  over  that  river,  is  there  ?  No.^ 
6.  Whom  did  he  leave  on  the  other  side  of  the  river  ?  Sa- 
binus.^  7.  Was  Bibrax  far  distant  from  this  camp?  Only' 
eight  miles.  8.  Did  they  make  a  iestudo,  or  undermine  the 
wall  ?  9.  Did  not  Iccius  send  us  a  messenger  regarding 
peace?     Yes.      10.    Shall  we  send  aid  to  them  or  not? 

I.  Questions  are  answered  liy  repi-atinp;  the  verb.  If  the  answer  be 
negative,  repeat  the  verb  ^Yith  non.     2.  Nut  nciniiautive.     3.  tautum. 


56 


LATIN    COMPOSITION 


LESSON    LI 

216.  Indirect  Questions.  —  §330.2;  573-575.  «  (210.  2  ;  334);  R.  300; 
G.  460,  467  ;  H.  649.  II.  I,  2,  3;  650.  I,  2  ;  651  (529.  I,  II.  i.  N.  i,  N.  3; 
3.  i),  2);  4,  5);   H-R.  537. /',  r,  </ ;   507.3. 

217.  An  indirect  question  is  a  question  which  depends,  usually 
as  object^  upon  a  verb  of  asking  or  upon  some  expression  of  uncer- 
tainty or  doubt.  The  introductory  word  may  be  num,  si.  or  -ne, 
-whether,  or  an  interrogative  pronoun  or  adverb. 

218.  The  double  indirect  question  is  introduced  by  the  same 
particles  as  the  double  direct  question  (cf.  sec.  213),  but  or  not  is 
expressed  by  necne  rather  than  by  ann5n. 

219.  The  regular  laws  for  tense-sequence  are  followed  in 
indirect  questions :  — 

I.  I  see  what y oil  are  domg  —  video  quid  facias. 
'  will 

are  going  to 

intend  to 

are  about  to 
'  were  doing 

have  done 

did 

had  done 
(did 

were  doing 
'  would 

intended  to 

were  about  to 

were  going  to 
6.  I  saw  what  you  had  done  —  vidi  quid  fecisses. 

a.  Observe  from  examples  2  and  5  that  a  future  indirect  ques- 
tion is  expressed  by  the  first  periphrastic. 

b.  Observe  from  example  3  that  after  a  principal  tense  were 
doing  and  had  done  are  expressed  by  the  perfect  subjunctive,  and 


2.  /  see  what  you  • 


3.  /  see  what  you  - 


I  saw  what  you  ■{ 

I' 


5.  I  saw  what you' 


io  —  video    quid   facturus 

sis. 


-video  quid  feceris  (perf. 
subjv.). 


vidi  quid  faceres. 


do  —  vidi 
esses. 


quid     factiinis 


DEPENDENT   MOODS  AND    TENSES  57 

do  not  be  misled  by  the  English  idiom  into  using  an  imperfect  for 
the  former  or  a  pluperfect  for  the  latter  (cf.  sec.  111). 

220.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

a  milibus  passuum  minus  duobus.      less  than  two  tniles  off. 
proelio  supersedere.  to  refrain  from  battle. 

ad  extremas  fossas.  at  the  ends  of  the  ditches. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  II.  7,8 

221.  1=  Tell  me  what  guides  Csesar  used.  2.  Caesar  tells ^ 
us  ^why  the  enemy  lost  hope  of  taking  the  town.  3.  Do  you 
know  where  the  enemy  pitched  (their)  camp  ?  Less  than  two 
miles  off.  4.  He  asked  whether  Caesar  refrained  from  battle 
ornot.  5.  I  will  try  what  the  enemy  can  do  by  valor.  6.  He 
asked  whether  the  place  in  front  of  the  camp  was  suitable  for 
drawing  up  a  line  of  battle.  7.  Do  you  not  know  how  much 
space  an  army  drawn  up  for  battle  occupies  ?  8.  I  will  try 
whether  or  not  I  can  place  the  engines  at  the  ends  of  the 
ditches.     9.  He  told  me  what  legions  had  been  last  enrolled. 

I.  dico.     2.   Follow  the  idiom  of  the  text. 

LESSON    LII 

222.  Review  the  Rules  of  Syntax,  Lessons  xli-li. 

223.  Review  the  following  idioms  and  phrases  :  — 
a  dextro  cornu.  causa  conloquendi. 
a  milibus  passuum  minus  duobus.      de  improvlso. 

ab  Germanis  orti.  de  rebus  agere. 

aciem  instruere.  deterreri  quin. 

ad  diem  fieri.  dum  haec  geruntur. 

ad  extremas  fossas.  Gallia  Romanis  interdicere. 

ad  speciem  uti.  in  aliquem  incidere. 

Caesarem  certiorem  facere.  iudicid  senatus. 

castra  p5nere,  loquendi  finem  facere. 


58  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

mignam  in  spem  venire.  proeliS  supersedere, 

manus  cogere.  pugnatum  est. 

moleste  ferre.  quid  in  bello  possunt? 

peccandi  Germanis  causa  n8n  est.  sine  uUo  pericul5. 
pons  in  flumine. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  II.  g,  lo 

224.  The  enemy  waited  for  a  long  time  (to  see)  if  Caesar 
would  cross  the  swamp,  but  after  he  had  led  his  troops  back 
into  camp  they  hastened  to  the  Axona  ^for  the  purpose  of 
destroying  the  bridge.  Since,  however,  they  could  neither 
take  the  city  nor  cross  the  river,  '^it  was  discussed  in  a  council 
whether  it  was  best  to  return  home  or  to  remain  longer.  We 
know  why  ®the  Bellovaci  could  not  be  persuaded  to  remain, 
and  there  was  the  added  fact  that  provisions  had  begun  to  fail. 

1.  Latin,  "with  this  purpose,  that  they  might  destroy."  2.  dellbera- 
tum  est.     3.  Follow  the  text. 

LESSON   LIII 

225.  Conditional  Sentences.  General  Statements.  —  §512,  513,  514. 
A-C  (304);  B.  301  ;  G.  5S9,  590  ;   H.  572,  573  (506,  507) ;  li-B.  573-577- 

226.  Conditional  Sentences  with  the  Indicative.  —  §  515.  «;  516.  i.  a 
(306,  307.  I.  a)  ;  B.  302  ;  G.  595;  H.  574,  575  (508);  H-B.  579.  a. 

227.  In  dealing  with  conditions,  the  first  thing  to  be  determined 
is  the  time.  The  English  is  often  misleading,  owing  to  the  fact 
that  the  tense  used  and  the  r^a/  time  denoted  by  it  are  not  always 
the  same  (cf.  sec.  71).     Compare  the  two  sentences:  — 

a.   li  this  zs  a  state,  I  afn  a  citizen. 

d.    If  the  general  arrives,  he  will  conquer. 
In  a  the  tense  used  and  the  time  are  both  presents  but  in  b  the 
present  arrives  is  really  future  in  time,  as  is  shown  by  the  verb 
will  cojiqner  in  the  conclusion.     It  is  to  be  observed  — 

I.  That  Latin  alivays  translates  the  real  time  of  the  English 
verb  rather  than  the  tense  in  which  it  may  appear. 


DEPENDENT   MOODS  AND   TENSES  59 

2.  That  in  English  conditions  the  conclusion  (apodosis)  is  more 
apt  to  show  the  real  time  than  the  condition  (protasis). 

228.  Next  to  the  deterffiination  of  the  time  comes  its  proper 
Latin  expression.  The  indicative  presents  no  difficulties,  as  its 
tenses  are  used  in  conditions  as  elsewhere.  The  time  denoted  by 
the  subjunctive  tenses  in  conditions  is  as  follows :  — 

Present  subjunctive  denotes  Future  time. 
Imperfect  subjunctive      "      Present     " 
Perfect  subjunctive  "      Future      " 

Pluperfect  subjunctive     "      Past  " 

Note  carefully  that  the  names  of   the  subjunctive  tenses 

AND  the  time  THEV  ACTUALLY  DENOTE  ARE  NOT  THE  SAME. 

229.  Conditions  are  classified  according  to  form  as  simple, 
FUTURE,  or  CONTRARY  TO  FACT  ;  and  according  to  tiyne  as  pres- 
ent, FUTURE,  or  PAST. 

These  facts  and  the  typical  use  of  moods  and  tenses  are  shown 
in  the  table  on  page  60. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  II.  11 

230.  I.  If  we  return  home,  we  can  use  our  home  supplies 
of  grain.  2.  As  to  the  fact  that  they  set  out  from  the  camp 
in  great  confusion,  there  was  ^no  particular  person  in  com- 
mand. 3.  If  each  one  sought  the  first  place  in  the  march, 
the  departure  seemed  like  a  flight.  4.  If  he  fears  ^  an  am- 
bush, he  will  keep  his  army  in  camp.  5.  Why  are  they  depart- 
ing ?  I  do  not  yet  see  why  they  are  departing.  6.  If  the 
matter  has  been  confirmed,  let  us  send  forward  the  cavalry. 

7.  If  these  attack  the  rear,  they  will  kill  a  great  number. 

8.  If  they  hear  the  noise,  they  will  seek  safety  for  themselves 
in  flight.  9.  If  you  cease ^  to  pursue  at  sunset,  you  will 
return  to  camp  without  any  danger. 

I.  Follow  the  text.     2.  Cf.  sec.  227. 


6o 


LATIN    COiMl'OSITlON 


MOODS  AND  TENSKS   IN   CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES 


Table  of 
Conditions. 


I.  Simple. - 


ti.  I'resent. 


b.   Past. 


II.  Future. - 


More 
Vivid. 
Future. 


III. 


Con- 
trary to  ■■ 
Fact. 


Prcsfnt    Indicative   in    both    clauses: 
Si  adest,  bene  est,  //  he  is  [now] 
here,  it  is  well. 

'  Imperfect  or  Perfect  Indicative  in  both 
clauses : 
SI  aderat,  bene  erat,  //  he  was 

[then]   here,  it  was  well. 
SI  adfuit,  bene  fuit,  if  he  has  been 
(was)  here,  it  has  been  (was)  well. 

Future  Indicative  in  both  clauses : 
Si  aderit,  bene  erit,  if  he  is  [shall 
be]  here,  it  will  be  well. 

Future  Perfect  Indicative  in  the  con- 
dition, Future  Indicative  in  the  con- 
clusion : 
Si  adfuerit,  bene  erit,  if  he  is  [shall 
have  been]  here,  it  will  be  well. 

Present  Subjunctive  in  both  clauses : 
ST  adsit,  bene  sit,  if  he  should  be 
here,  it  zvoiild  be  well. 

Perfect   Subjunctive   in   the   condi- 
tion.   Present    Subjunctive    in    the 
conclusion : 
Si  adfuerit,  bene  sit,  if  he  should 

be  [should  have  been]  here,  it 

would  be  well. 


('Imperfect  Subjunctive  in  both  clauses: 

I  Si  adesset,  bene  esset,  if  he  were 

Present,  -i.  ^^^^^-^  j^^^^  .^  ^^^^^^^  ^^  ^^^  ^j^^^ 

y  he  is  NOT  here). 

'  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  in  both  clauses : 

Si  adfuisset,  bene  fuisset,  if  he  had 

b.   Past.       ■{  [then]  been  here,  it  would  have 

been   well   (but    he   was    NOT 

here). 


b.  Less 
Vivid. 
Future. 


N.B.  The  mastery  of  this  table  is  essential. 


DEPENDENT    MOODS  AND   TENSES  6l 


LESSON    LIV 

231.  Conditional  Sentences  with  the  Present  or  Perfect  Subjunctive 
(Less  Vivid  Future).  — §516.  2. /5,f,^  {307.  2.  (J);  B.303;  G.  596;  H.  576, 
577  (509);  H-B.  5So.a. 

232.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

maiores  natu.  the  old  men. 

vineas  agere.  to  juove  sheds. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  II.   12,  13 

233.  I.  If  he  should  hear  that  the  city  was  without  de- 
fenders, he  would  storm  it.  2.  Have  you  not  heard  why  he 
could  not  take  it?  3.  They  did  not  move  the  sheds  ^ until 
the  camp  had  been  fortified.  4.  A  multitude  of  Suessiones 
arrived    in    the    city  ^before    the   mound  was   thrown    up. 

5.  If  you  ^set  up  towers,  the  Gauls  will  send  ambassadors. 

6.  If  the  Remi*  should  ask  that  the  Gauls  be  preserved,  they 
would  gain  their  request.  7.  I  will  receive  the  Suessiones 
in  surrender,  if  they  (shall)  give  up  their  arms.  8.  If  the  old 
men*  should  come  forth  from  the  town,  they  would  stretch 
out  their  hands  to  Caesar.  9.  If  Caesar  should  approach  the 
town,  the  women  and  children  would  beg  for  peace. 

I.  Cf.  sec.  202.  2.  Cf.  sec.  197.  3.  Not  present.  4.  Place  first. 
Why.?     Cf.  sec.  18. 

LESSON    LV 

234.  Conditional  Sentences  with  the  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  Subjunctive 
(Contrary  to  Fact).  — §517  (308);  B.304;  G.  597  ;  11.579(510);  II-B.  581. 

235.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

pro  aliquo  verba  facere.  to  speak  in  some  one''s  behalf. 

in  servitutem  redigere.  to  reduce  to  slavery. 

se  dedere.  to  surrender. 


62  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

For  Oral  Translaiion  —  Book  II.  14,  15 

236.  1.  Caisar  would  not  have  preserved  the  Bellovaci,  if 
Diviciacus  had  not  spoken  in  their  behalf.  2.  If  he  ^were  re- 
turning to  Ca,'sar,  he  would  dismiss  his  forces.  3.  If  the  Bel- 
lovaci^ should  be  influenced  by  their  chiefs,  they  would  make 
war  upon  the  Romans.  4.  If  we  ^are  reduced  to  slavery,  we 
shall  endure  all  manner  of  insults.  5.  If*  they  had  not* 
perceived  how  great  a  calamity  they  had  brought  upon  the 
state,  they  would  not  have  fled  to  Britain.  6.  If  the  state  was 
large,  he  demanded  six  hundred  hostages.  7.  If  they  allowed 
wine  to  be  imported,  their  courage  would  be  weakened.  8.  If 
they  had  surrendered  to  the  Romans,  the  other  Belgians  would 
have  blamed  them.  9.  If  ambassadors  had  been  sent,  they 
would  not  have  accepted  any  conditions  of  peace. 

I.  Observe  that  in  English  the  Latin  imperfect  subjv.  in  a  protasis  is 
usually  expressed  by  the  simple  past  or  by  the  English  subjv.  with  were. 
2.  Place  first.    Why  1    3.  Not  present.    Cf.  sec.  71.    4.  "  If  . . .  not,"  nisi. 

LESSON    LVI 

237.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

sub  sarcinis.  under  {their)  packs. 

nihil  negoti.  no  trouble. 

magnus  numerus  impediments-      a  great  quantity  of  baggage. 
rum. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  II.  16,  17 

238.  If  Csesar  had  marched  across  the  Sabis  river,  he 
would  have  found  there  all  the  Nervii  and  their  neighbors 
whom  they  had  persuaded  to  await  the  arrival  of  the  Romans. 
The  Belgae  thought  that  there  would  not  be  any  trouble  ^in 
attacking  them  under  their  packs.  ^This  plan  of  theirs  was 
assisted,  too,  by  the  fact  that  certain  of  the  Gauls  had  come 


DEPENDENT  MOODS  AND  TENSES 


63 


to  the  Nervii  and  pointed  out  that  a  great  quantity  of  bag- 
gage intervened  between  the  several  legions.  *They  said, 
"  If  you  should  attack  the  first  legion  while  the  others  are  a 
great  way  off,  and  useless  for  battle,  the  other  legions  would 
not  dare  to  make  a  stand." 

I.  Infin.  as  in  the  text.     2.  Latin,  "it  assisted  this  plan";  cf.  the  text. 
3.  Observe  that  the  form  of  died  here  introduces  a  direct  quotation. 


*  LESSON   LVII 

239.  I.  Conditions  in  which  the  Protasis  denotes  Generalizing  or  Re- 
peated Action.  —  §  ^iS.  a,l>  (304.  d;  309.  a,  c);  B.  302.  2,  3  ;  G.  566,  567, 
594.  N.  I  ;  H.  578  (50S.  5) ;  H-B.  504.  2;  540. 

II.  Conditions  Contrary  to  Fact  with  the  Indicative  in  the  Apodosis. — 
§  517.  c,  d  (308.  c,  d) ;  B.  304.  3  ;  G.  597.  3.  (a)  ;  H.  5S2,  583  (51 1.  N.  3  ;  2)  ; 
H-B.  581.  a;   582.  3.  a. 

240.  The  distinction  between  a  Particular  and  a  General  Con- 
dition is  important.  (See  A.  &  G.  §  513.  1,2.)  Such  conditions  are 
sometimes  introduced  by  cum  or  ubi,  in  the  sense  of  whenever,  if 
at  any  time.  Their  forms  of  expression  when  different  from  those 
of  Particular  Conditions  are  shown  by  the  following  table. 

GENERAL   CONDITIONS 


Time 

Condition  (Protasis) 

Conclusion  (Apodosis) 

Present 

Present  Subjunctive,  Sec- 
ond   Person    Singular,   of 
an  Indefinite  Subject 
or 
Perfect  Indicative 

Present  Indicative 

Past 

Imperfect  or  Pluperfect 

Subjunctive  (not  found  in 

Cicero) 

Pluperfect  Indicative 

Imperfect  Indicative 

64  LATIN   COMPOSITION 

a.  Observe  that  in  general  conditions  tlie  Latin  perfect  indica- 
tive may  be  translated  liive  a  present  and  the  pluperfect  like  a 
simple  past. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IL   i8,   19 

241.  I.  If  the  hill  had  not  been  wooded,  the  enemy  could 
not  have  kept  themselves  concealed.  2.  Whenever  he  sent 
forward  the  cavalry,  he  followed  with  all  the  forces.  3.  When- 
ever Cfcsar  approaches^  the  enemy,  he  leads  his  legion  '^in 
light  marching  order.  4.  If  you  make  an  attack  upon  them, 
they  do  not  dare  to  pursue.  5.  *If  they  should  make  an 
attack  on  our  cavalry,  they  (the  cavalry)  would  repulse  them 
easily.  6.  W'henever  they  made  an  attack  on  our  cavalry, 
they  repulsed  them  easily.  7.  If  they  had  made  an  attack 
on  our  cavalry,  they  could  *have  repulsed  them  easily.  8.  If 
the  Nervii  knew  the  order  of  march,  the  plan  of  joining  bat- 
tle ^ought  to  have  been  given  up.  9.  If  any  of  the  Nervii 
retired  into  the  forest,  they  again  rushed  forth  from  the 
forest  ^to  attack  us. 

I.  Cf.  sec.  240,  <7.  2.  Translate  by  one  word.  3.  Compare  carefully 
sentences  5  and  6 ;  the  first  is  a  particular,  the  second  a  general  condi- 
tion. 4.  Pres.  infin.  in  Latin.  5.  Second  periphrastic.  6.  Express  by 
the  gerundive  construction  of  purpose. 

*  LESSON   LVIII 

242.  Conditional  Clauses  of  Comparison  with  ac  st,  ut  st,  quasi,  et.c.  — 
§  524  (312);  B.  307  ;  G.  602  ;   H.  584  (513-  H);  H-B.  504.  3. 

243.  Remember  that  in  these  clauses  the  present  and  perfect 
subjunctive  are  used  after  principal  tenses,  although  the  English 
idiom  gives  a  contrary-to-fact  implication  and  would  lead  us  to 
expect  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect  (cf.  A.  &  G.  524.  n.  2):  — 

They  shudder  at  the  cruelty  of  Ariovistjis,  as  if  he  were 
present,  criidelitatem  Ariovisti  horrent  velut  si  adsit. 


DEPENDENT  MOODS  AND  TENSES      65 

With  a  past  tense  this  sentence  would  become  they  shuddered 
at  the  cruelty  of  Ariovistus,  as  if  he  were  (or  had  beoi)  present, 
and  the  Latin  would  use  secondary  tenses,  as,  crudelitatem  Ariovisti 
horrebant  velut  si  adesset. 

244.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

aggeris  petendi  causa.  to  seek  matej'ials  for  the  mound. 

ad  signa  consistere.  to  take  a  statid  beside  the  stand' 

ards. 
milites  cohortari.  to  address  the  soldiers. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  II.  20,  21 

245.  I.  Caesar  must  do  everything  at  the  same  time,  as  i£ 
the  enemy  were  already  in  the  camp.  2.  If  any  had  gone 
too  far,  to  seek  materials  for  the  mound,  they  were  summoned. 

3.  If  the  soldiers  had  not  been  trained  by  former  battles, 
they  would  have  had  to  wait  for  the  commands '  of  Caesar. 

4.  They  gave  themselves  orders,  as  if  they  were  instructed 
by  others.  5.  The  legati  did  what  seemed  best  ^of  their 
own  accord,  as  if  Caesar  were  present.  6,  Don't  be  dis- 
turbed in  heart,  but^  bravely  meet  the  attack  of  the  enemy. 
7.  *  Whenever  time  was  lacking,  they  did  not  take  the 
coverings  from  the  shields.  8.  Caesar  ^intended  to  address 
the  soldiers,  if  the  ®time  had  not  been  so  short.  9.  Each 
one  took  his  stand  beside  the  standards  which  he  first  saw, 
as  if  they  were  his  own. 

I.  Singular  in  Latin.  Make  this  word  the  subject  of  the  second 
periphrastic.  2.  per  se.  3.  et.  When  a  negative  sentence  is  followed 
by  a  positive  in  which  the  same  thought  is  continued,  the  Latin  uses 
"and"  where  English  uses  "but."     4.  General   condition,  past   time. 

5.  First  periphrastic.  6.  Latiii,  "  the  shortness  of  time  had  not  been 
so  great." 


66  LATIN    COMTOSITION 


LKSSON    LIX 

246.  Concessive  Clauses.  —  §  527.  a-ii\  549,  535.  e  (313);  B.  308, 
309;  G.  6o3ff.;  11.586,  593.2  (514,  515);  H-B.  532,  556.<i;  582.8; 
5-5.  5-6- 

247.  The  Latin  concessive  particles,  which  are  freely  trans- 
lated by  althoitgh,  have  each  a  peculiar  force  which  should  be 
carefully  observed  in  translating  from  English  into  Latin. 

quamquam  =  though  the  fad  is  that  (indie). 

licet  =  //  may  be  conceded  that  (subjv.,  pres.  or  perf.). 

quamvis  =  however  much  (subjv.). 

cum  =  though  the  circumstances  may  be  such  that  (subjv.). 

ct  81,  tametsi  1  .^  ..    ,.  ,  .    ^ 

yeven  7/ (inaic.  or  subiv.). 

etiamsi  J  •'  ^  ^    -^ 

248.  Observe  the  different  constructions  with  cum:  — 

C  when  (temporal),  indicative  or  subjunctive  (cf .  sec.  192). 
Cum-|  since  (causal),  subjunctive  (cf.  sec.  180). 

^although  (concessive),  subjunctive  (cf.  sec.  247). 

249.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

hostibus  resistere.  to  resist  the  enemy. 

cursu  exanimatus.  breathless  with  running. 

locus  inlquus  or  aliSnus.  an  unfavorable  place. 

in  fugam  conicere.  to  put  to  flight. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IL  22,  23 

250.  I.  However^  brave  the  Nervii  are,  they  cannot  con- 
quer the  Romans.  2.  Though  the  different  legions  were 
drawn  up  some  in  one  place  and  others  in  another,  they 
nevertheless  resisted  the  enemy  bravely.  3.  ''Since  the 
inequality  of  fortune  was  so  great,  different  results  followed. 
4.  Though  the  Atrebates  were  breathless  with  running,  they 


DEPENDENT   MOODS  AND   TENSES  6/ 

nevertheless  attempted  to  cross  the  river.  5.  Though' they 
had  advanced  into  an  unfavorable  place,  yet  they  put  the 
enemy  to  flight.  6.  They  renewed  the  battle  just  as  if  a 
great  part  of  them  had  not  been  killed.  7.  Even  if  the 
twelfth  legion  should  take  its  stand  on  the  right  wing,  yet 
nearly  the  whole  camp  would  be  exposed  on  the  left  side, 
8.  Although  the  Viromandui  had  been  routed,  yet  the  Nervii 
under  their  leader  Boduognatus  began  to  surround  the  legions 
on  the  exposed  flank. 

I.  quamvis.     2.  Cf.  sec.  180. 

LESSON   LX 

251.  Review  the  Rules  of  Syntax,  Lessons  liii-lix. 

252.  Review  the  following  idioms  and  phrases  :  — 
ad  signa  consistere.  maiores  natQ. 
aggeris  petendi  causa.                       milites  cohortarl. 
cursu  exanimatus.                               nihil  negoti. 
hostibus  resistere.                               pro  aliquo  verba  facere. 
in  fugam  conicere.                               se  dedere. 

in  servitutem  redigere.  sub  sarcinis. 

locus  iniquus  or  alienus.  vineas  agere. 

magnus  numerus   impedimento- 
rum. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  II.  24 

253.  The  cavalry,  though  they  had  been  routed  in  the 
first  attack  of  the  enemy,  were  returning  to  the  camp, 
when  suddenly^  they  met^  the  enemy  face  to  face  and 
again  fled;  and  the  camp-followers,  ^who  go  forth  to  plun- 
der whenever  the  army  is  victorious,  *took  to  headlong 
flight,  some  in  one  direction,  others  in  another,  as  if  our 
fortunes^  were  hopeless.  "To  this  was  added  the  fact 
that  the  enemy  had  possession  of  the  camp,  and  that  the 


68 


LATIN    COMPOSI  riON 


legions  were  nearly  surrounded.  ''No  wonder  that  the 
Treveri  —  thougli  tlu."y  have  a  great  reputation  for  valor 
—  terrified  by  the  noise  and  confusion,  reported  that  the 
Romans  had  been  defeated. 

I.  subito.  2.  Perfect  indie.  3.  A  general  condition.  4.  Follow  tlie 
idiom  of  the  te.xt.  5.  res.  6.  Cf.  sec.  208.  7.  nee  mirum  followed  i^y 
an  infin.  clause. 


LESSON   LXI 

254.  Clauses  with  dum,  niodo,  diim  modo,  denoting  a  Wish  or  a  Pro- 
viso.—§  528  (314);  B.  310;  G.  573;  H.  587  (513.  I);  II-B.  529. 

255.  Note  carefully  the  different  meanings  and  constructions  of 

dum :  — 

'a.    While  (in  tlie  time  but  not  occupying  the  whole  of 

it)  —  present  indicative  (cf.  sec.  64.  11). 

b.  While,  as  long  as  (in  the  time  and  throughout  the 
Dum-i        whole  period)  —  present,  past,  or  future  indicative 

(cf.  sec.  202). 

c.  Until,  usually  with  the  subjunctive  (cf.  sec.  202). 

d.  Provided  that,  with  the  subjunctive  (cf.  sec.  254). 


256.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

ab  novissimls.  oji  the  rear. 

res  in  angusto  est.  the  position  is  critical  (lit.  the 

thing  is  in  a  straif). 
prima  acies.  tJie  front  rank. 

operam  navare.  to  do  one''s  best. 


For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  II.  25 

257.  I.  Caesar  will  proceed  to  the  right  wing  Mn  his  desire 
to  encourage  the  twelfth  legion.  2.  If  the  soldiers  should 
be  crowded  together,  they  would  be  ^in  each  other's  way  for 
lighting.     3.  The  standard  would  not  have  been  lost,  if  the 


INDIRECT   DISCOURSE  69 

standard-bearer  had  not  been  killed.  4.  Some  on  the  rear 
are  withdrawing  from  the  battle  as  if  they  wished  to  avoid 
the  weapons.  5.  Though  the  position  is  critical,  yet  there  is 
no  reserve  that  can  be  sent.  6.  The  courage  of  the  soldiers 
will  be  renewed,  provided  that  Caesar  proceeds  to  the  front 
rank.  7.  Caesar  will  take  a  shield  from  a  soldier,  provided 
he  has  come  without  one.^  8.  Open  out  the  ranks  that 
you  may  be  able  to  use  your  swords  more  easily.  9.  The 
attack  of  the  enemy  will  be  checked,  provided  that  you  do 
your  best. 

I.  Latin,  "provided  only  that  he  may."     2.  Latin,  "for  a  hindrance 
to  themselves."     3.  Repeat  the  word  "  shield." 


VII.     MOODS   IN   INDIRECT   DISCOURSE 
LESSON    LXII 

258.  Declaratory  Sentences  in  Indirect  Discourse.  —  §  578-585  (336. 
\,z.a,b,c.^.  i,N.  2;  336.  A;  336.  B);  B.  313,314,317.318;  G.  648,649, 
650.  653-655;  H.  641-645,  617-620  (522,  523.  I  ;  524-526,  537) ;  H-B. 
533>  534-1.2;  589,  591,  593. 


259.  In  English  we  can  say  either — 
He  judges   that  the  Gauls  are 

brave 
or 

He  judges  the  Gauls  to  be  brave. 


The  Latin  has  only  the 
latter  form  of  expression 
and  can  say  only  — 

Putat  Gallos  fortes  esse. 


N.B.  The  English  conjunction  THAT  which  intro- 
duces INDIRECT  DISCOURSE  AFTER  VERBS  OF  saying,  thinking, 
knowing,  ETC,  IS  NOT  expressed  in  Latin. 

260.  Discriminate  carefully  between  the  different  meanings  of 
English  that  and  its  Latin  equivalents  :  — 

that  =  in  order  that  introduces  a  purpose  clause  (of.  sec.  137). 
that  =  so  that  introduces  a  result  clause  (cf.  sec.  154). 


/o 


LATIN   COMPOSITION 


that  =  the  fact  thai,  in  that,  introfluces  a  quod-clause  of  fact 

(cf.  sec.  207). 
that  after  verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  and  the  like  introduces 

indirect  discourse  and  is  not  expressed. 

261.   It  is  of  the  first  importance  to  rcmcmher  that  the  tense  of 

the  infinitive  in  indirect  discourse  is  determined  by  the  tense  of 

the  verb  which  it  represents  in  direct  discourse.     Its  tense  has 

nothing  to  do  with  the  tense  of  the  verb  of  saying  on  which  the 

indirect  discourse  depends,   and  is  not  affected  by  the  laws  of 

tense-sequence.     For  example,  if  we  have  in  direct  discourse  the 

sentence  — 

mllites  fortiter  piignant, 

the  verb  piignant,  being  present  in  tense,  will  be  represented  in 
indirect  discourse  by  the  present  infinitive,  no  matter  what  the 
tense  tnay  be  of  the  verb  that  introduces  the  indirect  discourse :  — 


He 


'  says 
said 

will  say  Vthat  the  soldiers  fight  (or  fought)  bravely, 
had  said 
etc. 

Dicit 
Dixit 
Dicet 
Dixerat 

etc. 


>  miiites  fortiter  piignare. 


262.   Some  of  the  commoner  verbs  followed  by  the  infinitive 
of  indirect  discourse  are  — 


,         r  scio. 
know\ 

I.  cognosco. 

'  puto. 

think  \  existimo. 

telU 

'dic5. 
nuntio. 
refero. 
certiorem  facio. 

perceive  • 

'  audio. 
comperi5 
sentio. 

^arbitror. 

promise  < 

'  polliceor. 
^  promitto. 

video. 

INDIRECT   DISCOURSE  71 

263.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

castris  potirl.  to  get  possession  of  the  camp. 

in  summo  coUe.  on  top  of  the  hill. 

cursu  incitato.  at  full  speed. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  II.  26 

264.  I.  Caesar  says  that  the  seventh  legion,  ^ which  stood 
near,  was  also  hard  pressed  by  the  enemy.  2.  He  said  that 
the  legions  which  were  hard  pressed  gradually  united.  3.  He 
saw  that  the  legions  feared  that  they  would  be  surrounded. 
4.  He  said  that  the  battle  had  been  announced  to  the  soldiers 
who  were  guarding  the  baggage.  5,  The  enemy  will  not  get 
possession  of  the  camp  provided  thac  Labienus  sends  the 
tenth  legion  to  our  assistance.  6,  He  says  that  the  enemy 
who  were  on  the  top  of  the  hill  saw^  the  two  legions  hasten- 
ing^ at  full  speed.  7.  What^  was  going  on  in  the  camp? 
I  saw  what  was  going  on  in  the  camp.  8.  We  know*  that 
the  legions  and  general  were  in  great  danger.  9.  Labienus 
said  that  he  left  nothing  undone  for  speed. 

I.  As  this  is  an  explanatory  parenthetical  clause,  it  is  not  affected  by 
the  indir.  disc,  and  has  its  verb  in  the  indie.  2.  Pres.  participle.  3.  Latin, 
"what  things."     4.  What  tense  of  cognosce?     Cf.  sec.  65. 

*LESSON  LXIII 

265.  I.  Interrogative  Sentences  in  Indirect  Discourse.  —  §  586,  587 
(338) ;  B.  315  ;  G.  651 ;   H.  642  (523.  IT) ;   H-B.  537. 

II.  Commands  in  Indirect  Discourse.  —  §  588.a.  N.  i,  N.  2  (339) ;  B.  316; 
G.  652;  11.642(523.110;  H-B.  538. 

266.  In  the  case  of  questions,  note  first  what  mood  i.s  used  in 
the  direct  form. 

If  the  mood  is  subjunctive,  the  question  is  rhetorical  (cf.  sec.  90) 
and  the  subjunctive  mood  will  be  retained  in  indirect  discourse 


72  LATIN    COMIdSrnoN 

with  such  chan<:;c  of  tense  as  ni:iy  he  necessary  by  the  law  of 
tense-sequence. 

If  tlie  mood  is  iniUaitr,.>Cy  the  question  is  cither  a  real  one 
expecting  an  answer,  or  it  is  merely  rhetorical  (cf.  sec.  90).  Real 
questions  are  expressed  in  indirect  discourse  by  the  subjunctive. 
Rhetorical  questions  with  the  indicative  are  equivalent  to  declara- 
tory sentences,  and  like  them  are  expressed  in  indirect  discourse 
by  the  infinitive. 

N.B.  A  real  question  in  the  direct  form  is  usually  in  the 
second  person ;  a  rhetorical  question  is  usjially  in  the  first  j  a 
question  in  the  third  person  may  be  either  real  or  rhetorical. 

267.  Observe  that  a  prohibition  expressed  by  noli  and  the 
infinitive  in  direct  discourse  becomes  tlie  hortatory  subjunctive 
with  ne  in  the  indirect ;  present  after  a  primary  tense,  imperfect 
after  a  secondary  :  — 

Direct:  Don't  fight  —  noli  pugnare. 
Indirect:  He  tells  him  not  to  fight  —  dicit  ne  pugnet. 
He  told  him  not  to  fight  —  dixit  ne  piignaret. 

268.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

uti  misericordia  in  with  ace.  to  show  mercy  toward. 

ab  iniiiria  se  prohibere.  to  refrain  from  doing  harm. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  II.  27,  28 

269.  I.  He  said  that  even  those  who  were  weakened  by 
wounds  renewed  the  battle.  2.  He  says,  why  do  not  the 
cavalry  wipe  out  the  disgrace  of  their  flight  by  their  valor  ? 
3.  The  leader  Boduognatus  told  them  'to  throw  back  the 
intercepted  javelins.  4.  He  replied,  ^what  but'  greatness 
of  courage  had  made  easy  things  out  of  (those  that  were) 
difficult?  5.  He  said,  *what  should  he  say  about  the  calamity 
of  a  state  which  had  been  reduced  from  six  hundred  sena- 
tors to  three  ?  6.  Caesar  preserved  the  Gauls,  ^whenever  he 
wished  to  seem  to  show  mercy  toward  the  wretched.     7.  He 


INDIRECT  DISCOURSE  73 

told  them  to  use  their  territory  and  towns.     8.   I  shall  order 
your  neighbors  ®to  refrain  from  doing  harm. 

I.  A  command  in  indir.  disc.  2.  A  rhetorical  question  in  indir.  disc. 
3.  nisi.  4.  A  deliberative  question  with  the  subjv.  in  dir.  disc,  conse- 
quently the  subjv.  will  be  retained  in  indir.  disc.  Cf.  sec.  90.  5.  Cf. 
sec.  240.     6.  Latin,  "  to  keep  themselves  from." 

LESSON   LXIV 

270.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

ex  omnibus  partibus.  on  all  sides. 

primo  adventu.  as  soon  as  he  arrived  (lit.  at  his 

first  arrival^. 
ab  tant5  spatio.  at  such  a  distance. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  II.  29,  30 

271.  Caesar  says  that  the  Aduatuci,  -^who  are  descended 
from  the  Cimbri  and  Teutones,  had  chosen  for  an  abode  a 
place  remarkably  fortified  by  nature,  since  it  had  steep  clififs 
on  every  side  ;  and  that  they  had  fortified  the  gentle  sloping 
approach  which  was  left  on  one  side,  by  a  very  high  double 
wall.  Caesar,  as  soon  as  he  arrived,  commanded  his  (men) 
^to  hem  in  the  city  with  a  twelve-foot  wall  and  to  set  up  the 
tower.  When  the  enemy ^  saw  so  big  a  machine  being  set 
up  at  such  a  distance  they  laughed  and  said,  with  what 
strength,  pray,  did  men  of  such  small  stature  hope  to  set  a 
tower  of  such  weight  on  the  wall  ? 

I.  A  parenthetic  clause  and  hence  not  affected  by  the  indir.  disc. 
2.  A  command  in  indir.  disc,  after  impero.  If  we  insert  ut  we  have  an 
object  clause  of  purpose  (cf.  sec.  129).  The  sense  is  practically  the 
same.     3.  Place  first. 


74  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

LESSON   LXV 

272.  Conditional  Sentences  with  the  Indicative,  or  of  the  First  Class, 
in  Indirect  Discourse.  —  §  589.  a  (337.  1,2;  Examples  i,  2,  3);  B.  319; 
G.  595.  R.  I  ;  656.  1,  2;  657;   II.  646(527.  I);   H-B.  534.  i.l>;  2;   536. 

273.  The  condition  (protasis)  of  a  conditional  sentence,  being 
a  subordinate  clause,  regularly  has  its  verb  in  the  subjunctive 
(cf.  sec.  268). 

274.  The  conclusion  (apodosis)  of  a  conditional  sentence,  being  a 
principal  clause,  regularly  has  its  verb  in  the  infinitive  (cf.  sec.  261). 

a.  The  only  exception  to  this  rule  is  when  the  direct  form  has 
the  imperative  which  would  become  subjunctive,  or  when  it  has 
the  hortative,  optative,  or  deliberative  subjunctive  which  would 
remain  subjunctive.     Practically  such  instances  are  very  rare. 

275.  The  future  infinitive  is  used  in  the  conclusion  (apodosis) 
of  a  future  condition,  and  there  is  no  di.stinction  in  indirect  dis- 
course bet^veen  the  more  vivid  and  the  less  vivid  form :  — 

Siturris  moenibus  adpropinquabit,  legates  mittent  (more  vivid). 
Si  turris  moenibus  adpropinquet,  legates  mittant  (less  vivid). 

Either  sentence  in  indirect  discourse  becomes  — 

Dicit,  si  turris  moenibus  adpropinquet,  e5s  legatos  missiiros  esse. 

276.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

adpropinquare  moenibus.  fo  approach  the  walls. 

se  suaque  omnia.  themselves  and  all  their  posses- 

sions. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  TI.  31,  32 

277.  I.  He  says  that  if  they  see  the  tower  approaching 
the  walls,  they  will  send  ambassadors  concerning  peace. 
2.  Caesar  replied  that  if  they  had  come  ^to  seek  peace,  ^they 
should  give  up  themselves  and  all  their  possessions.  3.  He 
said  that  even  if  he  should  preserve  the  Aduatuci,  he  would 


INDIRECT   DISCOURSE 


75 


deprive  them  of  their  arms.  4.  They  say  that  if  they  have 
hostile  neighbors,  they  (the  neighbors)  envy  their  valor. 
5.  Caesar  said  that  he  would  defend  them  from  their  ene- 
mies, if  they  should  surrender  their  arms.  6.  Caesar  says 
that  he  will  preserve  you,  if  you  (shall)  surrender  before  the 
battering-ram  touches  the  wall.  7.  He  said  that  if  the  mat- 
ter was  reported,  they  did  what  was  ordered.  8.  They  say 
that  if  all  the  arms  were  thrown  into  the  ditch,  the  heap 
equaled  the  height  of  the  wall. 

I.  Not  inlin.     2.  For  the  imperative  of  dir.  disc. 

LESSON  LXVI 

278.  Conditional  Sentences  with  the  Present  or  Perfect  Subjunctive,  or 
of  the  Second  Class,  in  Indirect  Discourse.  — •§  589.  a.  3  ^^^yj.  i,  2.  a.  3) ; 
B.  320;  G.  658;  H.  646  (527.  II);  H-B.  534.  i.  3;  2;  536. 

279.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

sub  vesperum.  at  evening. 

eruptionem  facere.  to  make  a  sally. 

in  dicionem  populi  Romani  redi-  to  bring  under  the  sway  of  the 
gere.  Roman  people. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  II.  33-35 

280.  I.  He  said  that  if  the  gates  should  be  closed  at 
evening,  the  soldiers  would  go  forth  from  the  town.  2.  We 
believe  that  the  Romans  would  withdraw  their  guards,  if  we 
should  surrender.^  3.  He  said  that  the  Gauls  used  to  make 
shields  of  bark,  '^if  the  shortness  of  time  demanded  it. 
4.  Caesar  commanded  the  soldiers  ^to  give  the  signal  with 
fires,  if  the  enemy  should  make  a  sally.  5.  He  says  if  the 
men  were  brave  they  fought  with  spirit.  6.  Caesar  perceived 
that  the  enemy  would  fight  fiercely,  if  every  hope  rested  on 


;6  LATIN    COMTOSITION 

valor  .ilonc.  7.  We  thou<;ht  that  if  Caesar  should  batter 
down  the  gates,  no  one  would  defend  (them).  8.  He  was 
informed  that  if  he  should  send  Crassus  with  a  single  legion, 
he  would  bring  the  maritime  states  under  the  sway  of  the 
Roman  people.  9.  Ca;sar  says  that  if  the  tribes  which 
dwell  across  the  Rhine  send  ambassadors,  he  will  order 
them  to  return  the  following  summer. 

I.  Remember  that  this  verb  in  Latin  is  always  followed  by  the  reflex- 
ive object ;  e.g.  /  surrender  =  dedo  me.  2.  A  general  condition  in  indir. 
disc.     3.  Not  infin.     Cf.  sec.  271,  note  2. 

LESSON   LXVII 

281.  Conditional  Sentences  with  the  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  Subjunctive, 
or  of  the  Third  Class,  in  Indirect  Discourse.  —  §  5S9.  l>.  1-4.  n.  i,  n.  3  (337, 
^.1,2,3);  B.  321,  322;  G.  659;  IL647  (527.  IILn.i);  H-B.  5S1. /.. 
i),  N. ;  472.  c. 

282.  The  verb  in  the  condition  (protasis)  of  a  condition  of  the 
third  class  (contrary  to  fact)  suffers  no  change  in  mood  or  tense 
on  becoming  indirect. 

283.  The  verb  in  the  conclusion  (apodosis)  of  a  condition  of 
the  third  class  (contrary  to  fact)  on  becoming  indirect  becomes 
the  future  participle  in  -urus  with  fuisse.  Observe  that  the  verb 
in  the  conclusion  (apodosis)  shows  no  distinction  between  the 
present  and  past  forms  of  this  condition.  Such  distinction  is, 
however,  retained  by  the  verb  in  the  protasis.  For  example,  in 
the  two  sentences  — 

si  Caesar  adesset,  hostes  non  vincerent, 
si  Caesar  adfuisset,  hostes  non  vicissent, 

the  verbs  in  the  conclusion,  vincerent  and  vicissent,  would  both 
become  victuros  fuisse  in  indirect  discourse ;  but  adesset  and 
adfuisset,  remaining  unchanged,  would  preserve  the  distinction 
between  the  present  and  past  form. 


INDIRECT   DISCOURSE  7/ 

284.  miOMS  AND  PHRASES 
opus  esse.  to  be  necessary. 
secunda  proelia  facere.                        to  fight  successful  battles. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  III.   i 

285.  I.  He  said  that  if  the  road  over  the  Alps  had  not 
been  dangerous/  Caesar  would  not  have  sent  a  legion  there. ^ 
2.  We  believe  that  there  would  have  been  no  reason  for 
sending,  had  not  merchants  been  in  the  habit  of  going  by 
that  route.  3.  He  says  that  if  he  thinks  it  necessary,  he 
will  pass  the  winter  in  these  regions.  4.  He  thought  that  if 
the  enemy  were  fighting  successful  battles,  they  would  not 
give  hostages  to  Galba.  5.  Galba  said  that  he  would  not 
have  passed  the  winter  in  Octodurus,  ^had  it  not  been  neces- 
sary. 6.  He  says  that  the  plain  would  be  larger,  if  it  were 
not  cut  into  two  parts  by  a  river.  7.  I  think  that  it  would 
have  been  better  if  Galba  had  not  assigned  one  part  of  the 
village  to  the  Gauls.  8.  Galba  said  that  the  cohorts  would 
have  abandoned  Octodurus,  had  he  not  fortified  that  village 
with  a  wall  and  ditch. 

I.  Latin,  periculosus, -a, -um.     2.  eo.     3.  I.e.  "if  it  had  not,"  etc. 
LESSON   LXVni 

286.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

superiora  loca.  the  high  ground. 

consilium  capere.  to  take  counsel. 

salutem  desperate.  to  despair  of  safety. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book.  HI.    2,3 

287.  ^  After  the  surrender  had  been  made  and  the  hos- 
tages received,  Galba  thought^  *that  there  was  nothing  of 


78  LATIN   COMPOSITION 

a  hostile  character  to  fear  ;  but  when  he  was*^  informed  that 
all  the  Gauls  had  left  the  village,  and  saw"'^  that  nearly  all 
the  higher  ground  was  already  held  by  a  multitude  of  armed 
men,  he  knew  that  the  Gauls  were  planning''  to  crush  the 
legion.  He  says  that  this  '' would  not  have  happened  if  the 
legion  had  been  full,  and  if  the  Gauls  had  not  persuaded 
themselves  that  the  Romans  were  trying  to  add  those 
regions  to  the  province.  When  a  council  had  been  quickly 
called,  some,  now  almost  despairing  of  safety,  thought  that 
if  the  baggage  should  be  abandoned,  they  could®  hasten  to 
safety. 

I.  Abl.  abs.  2.  Pluperfect.  3.  Latin,  "nothing  concerning  war 
ought  to  be  feared."  4.  Latin,  "taking  counsel."  5.  As  accidd  has 
no  fut.  part,  we  must  use  futiirum  fuisse  ut  with  the  imperfect  subjv. 
6.  Possum  has  no  fut.  part.     Cf.  note  5. 

*  LESSON   LXIX 

288.  Passive  Subjunctive  Apodoses  in  Indirect  Discourse.  —  §  589.  b.  3 ; 
569- «  (337- -^^  3;  288./);  B.  270.  3;  321.  I,  2;  G.  248.  N.  3;  H.  647.  2; 
619.  2  (527.  III.  N.  I  ;  537.  3) ;  H-B.  472.  c. 

289.  The  passive  subjunctive  in  the  conclusion  (apodosis)  of  a 
conditional  sentence  becomes  — 

a.  \n  future  conditions,  fore  or  futiirum  esse  with  ut  and  the 
subjunctive.  The  tense  of  the  subjunctive  will  be  present  or  per- 
fect after  primary  tenses,  imperfect  or  pluperfect  after  secondary 
tenses. 

b.  In  conditiotis  cotitmiy  to  fact,  futiirum  fuisse  ut  with  the 
imperfect  subjunctive. 

290.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

integris  viribus.  with  unimpaired  strength. 

sui  recipiendi  facultas.  an   opportunity  of  recovering 

themselves. 


INDIRECT   DISCOURSE  79 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  III.    4,  5 

291.  I.  He  says  that  if  a  short  space  of  time  had  not 
intervened,  there  would  have  been  hardly  time  to  carry  out 
the  plans  agreed  upon.  2.  They  seem  to  think  that  if  they 
hurl  their  javelins  against  the  wall,  no  weapon  will  be  sent 
in  vain.  3.  He  said  that  the  camp  would  not  have  been 
hard  pressed,  if  others  had  not  come  up  with  unimpaired 
strength.  4.  He  saw  that  if  the  enemy  should  withdraw 
from  battle,  an  opportunity  would  be  given  our  men  of 
recovering  themselves.  5.  He  said  that  if  weapons  should 
fail  our  men,  nothing  could  be  done.  6.  I  do  not  think 
that  Baculus,  the  centurion,  ^  would  have  run  up  to  Galba,  if 
''the  situation  had  not  been  desperate.  7.  He  said  that  the 
sally  would  not  have  been  made,  if  the  centurions  had  not 
pointed  out  that  single  hope  of  safety.  8.  ^It  is  clear  that 
the  Romans  would  have  been  destroyed  if  they  had  not 
placed  every  hope  of  safety  in  their  valor. 

I.  The  verb  accurro  has  no  future  participle.  What  construction 
must  be  used  ?     2.  Follow  the  idiom  in  the  text.     3.  constat. 

*  LESSON  LXX 

292.  Implied  or  Informal  Indirect  Discourse.  —  §  592.  i,  2,  3  (340, 
341);  B.  323;  G.  508.  3;  628,  663.  2;  H.  649.  I  (528.  I);  H-B.  535.  i. 
a;  536.  a. 

293.  The  fundamental  difference  between  the  indicative  and 
subjunctive  moods  is  what  determines  the  construction  in  implied 
indirect  discourse  and  in  clauses  dependent  on  a  subjunctive  or 
equivalent  infinitive. 

Statements  of  fact  and  of  actual  occurrences  are  in  the  indicative, 
things  imagined  or  represented  as  mere  possibilities  are  expressed 
by  the  subjunctive.  For  example,  in  the  sixtli  sentence  below,  if 
the  relative  clause  "which  inhabited  Illyricum"  is  a  statement 


8o  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

of  fact  for  whicli  the  speaker  assumes  all  responsibility,  the  in- 
dicative is  employed.  On  the  other  hand,  if  he  wishes  to  show 
that  the  statement  is  another's  (e.g.  Cx'sar's),  a  mere  possibility 
for  which  the  speaker  wishes  to  assume  no  responsibility,  the  sub- 
junctive must  be  used. 

So  the  subjunctive  in  a  clause  dependent  on  a  subjunctive  shows 
that  the  dependent  clause  is  an  essential  part  of  the  clause  on  which  it 
depends,  partakes  of  its  nature,  and  shares  in  its  mood.  If,  however, 
the  speaker  wishes  to  show  that  the  dependent  clause  states  Z-fact 
and  is  independent  of  the  subjunctive  clause,  he  uses  the  indicative. 

294.  IDIOMS   AND  PHRASES 

in  spem  venire.  to  hai'e  Jiopes  (lit.  io  co»ie  into 

hope). 
in  hibema.  into  winter  quarters. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  III.  6,  7 

295.  I.  They  hoped  for  a  'change  of  fortune,  if  they 
should  make  a  sally  from  all  the  gates.  2.  It  is  established 
that  they  had  hopes  of  taking  the  camp.  3.  The  enemy 
were  terrified  '^because  they  were  surrounded  on  every  side. 

4.  Galba  returned  to  the  province,  ^because  he  was  unwilling 
to  tempt  fortune  too  often.  5.  I  went  into  winter  quarters 
with  one  design,  and  met  with  *  another  state  of  affairs. 
6.  Caesar  wished  to  visit  the  tribes  which  inhabited  Illyri- 
cum.  7.  Caesar  tells  about  a  sudden  war  ^ which  arose  in 
Gaul.  8.  Crassus,  who  was  wintering  among  the  Andes, 
was  the  cause  of  this  war.  9.  He  sent  out  prefects  ^because 
there  was  a  scarcity  of  grain  in  these  regions.  10.  Caesar 
says  that  he  would  not  have  set  out  for  Illyricum,  if  Gaul 
had  not  been  subdued. 

I.  Latin,  "changed  fortune."  2.  I.e.  "because  (as  they  thought)." 
Cf.  sec.  176.    3.  What  mood  should  be  used  ?   4.  Latin,  "other  things." 

5.  I.e.  "which  (as  he  says)."     6.  I.e.  "because  ^as  he  said)." 


i 


INDIRECT   DISCOURSE  8l 


*  LESSON   LXXI 


296.  Subjunctive  of  Integral  Part  or  Attraction.  —  §  593.  «.  N.  i,  N.  2 
(342) ;  B.  324 ;  G.  629,  663  ;   H.  652  (529.  II) ;   H-B.  539. 

297.  ■    IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

initium  facere.  to  begin  (lit.  make  a  beginning). 

servitiitem  perferre.  to  ettdiire  slavery. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  III.  8 

298.  I.  Caesar  tells  about  the  Veneti,  ^ whose  influence  is 
by  far  the  greatest.  2.  It  is  their  custom^  to  make  tributary 
nearly  all  who  use  that  sea.  3.  The  Veneti  excel  the  others 
in  power,  ^because  they  hold  the  harbors,  which  (are)  few 
in  number  (and)  lie  at  long  intervals.  4.  They  think  that 
they  will  get  back  the  hostages  which  they  gave  to  Crassus. 
5.  They  were  induced  by  these  *to  seize  the  ambassadors 
who  had  been  sent  by  Crassus.  6.  They  urged  the  states 
to  abide  in  that  liberty  which  they  had  received  from  their 
ancestors.  7.  When  the  Veneti  ^ began  to  seize  the  ambas- 
sadors that  had  been  sent  to  them,  their  neighbors  did  the 
same.  8.  I  think  that  the  Romans  who  were  sent  would 
not  have  been  seized,  if  the  Gauls  had  preferred  to  endure 
slavery.  9.  If  you  wish  to  regain  those  we  have  seized, 
send  us  back  our  hostages. 

I.  I.e.  on  the  authority  of  Caesar.  Implied  indir.  disc.  2.  mos. 
3.  Subjv.  clause  as  depending  on  Csesar's  authority.  4.  Not  infin. 
5.   Latin,  "  had  made  a  beginning  of  seizing." 


62  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

LESSON   LXXII 

299.  Review  the  Rules  of  Syntax,  Lessons  i.xr-LXXI. 

300.  Review  tlic  following  idioms  and  phrases  :  — 

ab  iniuria  se  prohibere.  integris  viribus. 

ab  uovissimis.  operam  navare. 

ab  tanto  spatio.  opus  esse. 

adpropinquare  moenibus.  prima  acies. 

castris  potiri.  res  in  angusto  est. 

consilium  capere.  salutem  desperare. 

cursu  incitat5.  se  suaque  omnia. 

eruptionem  facere.  secunda  proelia  facere. 

ex  omnibus  partibus.  servitutem  perferre. 

in  dicionem  populi  Romani.  sub  vesperum. 

in  hiberna.  sui  recipiendi  facultas. 

in  spem  venire.  superi5ra  loca. 

in  summo  coUe.  iiti  misericordia  in  with  ace. 

initium  facere. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  III.  9 

30L  When  the  Veneti  had  been  informed  that  men-of- 
war  were  being  built  on  the  Loire,  which  ^  flows  into  the 
ocean,  and  that  Caesar  -was  coming  as  soon  as  ^the  time  of 
year  would  permit,  they  determined  to  prepare  for  the  war 
which  *was  impending.  They  perceived  the  magnitude  of 
the  danger  and  how  great  a  crime  they  had  committed  '^in 
that  they  had  thrown  the  ambassadors  into  chains  ;  but  never- 
theless they  were  confident  that  the  Romans,  who  were  not 
acquainted  with  the  places*'  where  they  were  going  to  carry 
on  war,  could  not  remain  with  them  long.  For  they  knew 
the  shallows,  the  harbors  and  islands,  and  had  very  many 
ships  ;  and  navigation  is  a  very  different  thing  in  ^n  inclosed 
sea  and  on  the  mighty  ocean. 


NOUN  AND   ADJECTIVE   FORMS    OF  VERB       83 

/.  Why  not  subjv.  ?  2.  Future  infin.  3.  Follow  the  idiom  of  the 
text.  4.  impended,  subjv.  because  the  thought  of  the  Veneti.  5.  A  quod- 
clause  of  cause.     6.  Remember  that  locus  is  neuter  in  the  plural. 


VIII.     NOUN  AND   ADJECTIVE   FORMS   OF   THE   VERB 
LESSON    LXXIII 

302.  Tenses  of  the  Infinitive.  — §  4S6,  584  (288,  336.  a);  B.  270; 
G.  281,  530,  531 ;  H.  617-620  (537)  ;  H-B.  472,  593.  a. 

303.  The  Infinitive  as  Subject  or  Predicate.  —  §  452,  454  (270.  i.  a,  b; 
272.  R.  2  ;  330.  a,  b,  c)  ;  B.  325-327,  329,  330,  332.  N. ;  G.  419-422,  535 ; 
H.  611,615,  616.  I  (534.  I.N.  I,  N.  2;  538,539.1);  H-B.  597.  I.  a);  585, 
589,  590.  I,  2. 

304.  Observe  that  the  Latin  present  infinitive  must  sometimes 
be  translated  by  an  English  past;  for  example, — 

Dicit  se  venire  is  translated  he  says  that  he  is  coming, 

but 

Dixit  se  venire  is  translated  he  said  that  he  was  coming. 

305.  In  deciding  what  tense  of  the  infinitive  should  be  used 
in  an  indirect  statement,^  it  is  a  good  plan  to  make  the  indirect 
statement  direct.     Then  — 

a.  A  present  indicative  of  the  direct  becomes  present  infinitive 
in  the  indirect. 

b.  Any  past  tense  of  the  indicative  becomes  perfect  infinitive. 

c.  A  future  indicative  becomes  future  infinitive,  or,  if  the  verb 
be  passive  or  lack  the  future  participle,  fore  (futiirum  esse)  ut 
with  the  subjunctive. 

To  illustrate:  he  said  that  he  would  come  is  an  indirect  state- 
ment. The  direct  form,  i.e.  what  he  said  in  his  own  words,  was, 
/  will  come.  This  is  the  future  indicative  and  would  become 
the  future  infinitive  in  the  indirect  form  :  hence,  dixit  se  ventiinim 

6886. 

1  Cf.  also  sec.  261. 


84  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

306.  Tlie  infinitive  as  subject  is  especially  common  after  est, 
with  a  predicate  noun  or  adjective.     Such  expressions  are  — 

fas  est,  //  IS  right.  fama  est,  //  is  rumored. 

nefas  est,  /'/  is  wrong.  verum  est,  it  is  true. 

turpe  est,  //  is  disgraceful.  falsum  est,  //  is  false. 

mirum  est,  //  is  strange.  necesse  "i      ... 

y  est,  tt  IS  necessary. 
manifestuml  ,   .  opus      J 

^est,  //  IS  plain. 
apertum       J 

307.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

in  officio  continere.  to  keep  faithful. 

per  vim.  by  force. 

jiliquem  alicui  rei  praeficere.  to  place  some  one  in  command 

of  something. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  III.   lo,  ii 

308.  I.  It  is  plain  that  there  were  many  difficulties  in 
waging  this  war.  2.  Nevertheless  ^Caesar  decided  not  to 
leave  this  part  unnoticed.  3.  All  men  ought ^  by  nature  to 
hate  a  state  of  slavery.  4.  It  was  reported  to  Caesar  that 
several  states  were  conspiring.  5.  It  is  plain  that  Caesar' 
ought  to  distribute  his  army*  more  widely.  6.  It  seemed 
advantageous^  to  send  Labienus  to  the  Treveri  before  more 
states  should  conspire.  7.  Labienus,  I  order  you  to  visit 
the  Remi,  who  of  the  Belgae  are^  nearest  to  Gaul.  8.  It  is 
necessary  to  keep  the  Belgae  faithful.  9.  It  is  evident  that 
if  the  Germans  had  crossed  the  river  by  force,  they  would 
have  been  restrained.  10.  ''It  is  of  importance  to  Caesar 
that  the  tribes  of  Aquitania  should  not  send  aid.  11.  I  will 
see  to  keeping  that  force  away.  12.  It  was  rumored  that 
Caesar  had  placed  Brutus  in  command  of  the  ships. 

I.  Caesari  placuit.  2.  oportet.  3.  Dative  of  agent  with  second  peri- 
phrastic. 4.  Ace.  subject  of  infin.  5.  utile.  6.  Subjv.,  if  part  of  the 
order,  otherwise  indie.     7.  interesse,  with  the  genitive. 


NOUN  AND  ADJECTIVE    FORMS   OF  VERB       85 

LESSON   LXXIV 

309.  The  Infinitive  as  Object.  —  §  459,  579,  563.  a,  b  ;  582  (272,  330.  B) ; 
B.  329. 331. 332;  G- 526-533;  H.  414,  613,  614  (534,  535);  H-B.589,587. 

310.  The  infinitive  with  subject  accusative  is  used  as  object 
after  the  following  classes  of  verbs  :  — 

a.  Most  frequently  after  verbs  of  sayings  thinking,  and  the  like, 
which  introduce  indirect  discourse  (cf.  sec.  262). 

b.  After  iube5,  order,  veto,  forbid,  patior,  allow. 

c.  Sometimes  after  cupio,  volo,  nol5,  malo  (but  cf.  sec.  130). 

311.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

in  extremis  lingulis.  on  the  ends  of  tongues  of  land. 

niillus  pedibus  aditus.  no  approach  by  land. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  III.  12 

312.  I.  Caesar  says  that  the  towns  are  located  on  the 
ends  of  tongues  of  land.  2.  ■'It  is  said  that  ^when  the  tide 
was  high  they  had  no  approach  by  land.  3.  It  is  clear  that 
'when  the  tide  goes  down  the  ships  ^will  be  dashed  upon  the 
shallows.  4.  The  Romans  bore  it  ill  that  the  siege  of  the 
towns  was  hindered  by  these  things.  5.  The  soldiers  were 
ordered  to  shut  out  the  sea  by  dikes.  6.  They  hoped  that  the 
Gauls  would  despair  of  ^ their  fortunes.  7.  It  was  easy  to 
bring  up  a  great  number  of  ships  and  retreat  to  the  nearest 
towns.  8.  He  was  informed  that  there  was  the  greatest  diffi- 
culty in  sailing  because  there  were  almost  no  harbors.  9.  The 
advantages  of  the  place  allowed  them  to  defend  themselves  for 
a  great  part  of  the  summer.  10.  The  storms  were  of  such  a 
nature  that  the  ships  which  Cassar  had  made  were  detained. 

I.  Remember  that  for  the  tenses  of  incomplete  action  the  personal 
construction  is  preferred.     2.  Follow  the  idiom  of  the  text.     3.  Abl.  abs. 

4.  Use  fore  ut  with  the  subjv.  to  avoid  the  fut.  pass,  infin.  which  is  rare. 

5.  desperate  is  followed  by  the  dat.  or  the  ace.  or  by  the  abl.  with  de. 


►  hasten. 


86  LATIN   COMPOSITION 

LESSON  LXXV 

313.  The  Complementary  Infinitive.  —  §456,  457.  458  (271);  B.  328; 
G.  423  ;   H.  607,  608  (533) ;   II-B.  586.  a. 

314.  The  Historical  Infinitive.  —  §463.  N,  (275);  B.  335;  G.  647; 
11.610(536.  I);  H-B.  595. 

315.  Some  of  the  commoner  verbs  followed  by  the  complemen- 
tary infinitive  are  — 

possum,  avi  able.  contendo, 

debeo,  ought.  festino, 

V0I6,    "^    .    .  maturo, 

\  desire. 
cupio,  J  propero, 

nolo,  be  unwilling.  coepi,    ^  , 

mal5,  prefer.  incipio,  J 

audeo,  dare.  soleo,  be  accustomed. 

Conor,  try.  statuo,      "1    ,  ,        .       j    -j 

•^  \  determine,  decide. 

constituo,  J 

316.  Observe  that  the  subject  of  the  historical  infinitive  is  in 
the  nominative,  not  in  the  accusative. 

317.  miOMS  AND  PHRASES 

tanta  onera  navium.  ships  of  such  weight  (lit.  such 

weights  of  ships'). 
bellum  parare.  to  prepare  for  war. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  III.   13 

318.  I.  The  Veneti  built^  ships,  fortified^  their  towns,  and 
prepared^  for  war.  2.  They  used^  to  make  the  prows  very 
high  to  receive  the  waves  more  easily.  3.  They  tried  to 
make  the  ships  capable  of  enduring  any  violence  whatsoever. 
4.  They  thought  that  linen  sails  could  not  withstand  the 
strength'  of  the  vdnds.  5.  Ships  of  such  weight  cannot  be 
managed  by  sails.  6.  They  feared  to  fasten  the  anchors 
with  ropes  on  account  of  the  size  of  the  waves.     7.  Caesar 


NOUN  AND  ADJECTIVE   FORMS   OF  VERB       87 

hastened  to  the  army,  divided  the  forces,  and  sent  Labienus 
to  the  Treveri.  8.  The  ships  of  the  enemy  are  of  such  a 
nature  that  we  cannot  injure  them  *by  ramming.  9.  When 
the  wind  began  to  rage,  they  easily  endured  the  storm. 
ID.  Their  strength  was  so  great  that  they  did  not  fear 
''being  left  by  the  tide  at  all. 

I.  Note  that  the  historical  infinitive  is  descriptive,  and  that  usually 
two  or  more  occur  together.  2.  soleo.  3.  Latin,  "attacks."  4.  Latin, 
"by  the  beak."  5.  What  is  the  construction  in  Latin  after  verbs  of 
fearing? 

LESSON  LXXVI 

319.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

hostibus  nocere.  to  inflict  injuries  on  the  enemy. 

rationem  pugnae  insistere.  to  adopt  a  plan  of  battle. 

magno  usui  esse.  to  be  of  great  service. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  III.   14 

320.  When  Caesar  had  stormed  several  toAvns  to  no  pur- 
pose and  had  not  been  able  to  inflict  injuries  on  the  enemy, 
he  determined  to  wait  for  the  fleet  which  ^had  been  assigned 
to  Brutus.  When  this  had  arrived,  ^at  first  it  was  not  clear 
to  Brutus  what  plan  of  battle  to  adopt,  for  he  knew  that 
the  enemy's  ships  were  completely  furnished  with  every  kind 
of  arms,  and  ^that  valor  was  the  only  thing  in  which  his 
own  soldiers  excelled.  The  Romans,  however,  had  prepared 
iron  hooks  which  were  of  great  service  ;  for  with  these  they 
seized  the  ropes,  tore  them  away,  and  destroyed  all  useful- 
ness of  the  ships  '^at  a  single  stroke. 

I.  Indie,  or  subjv.  or  either?  2.  primo,  distinguished  from  primum. 
3.  Latin,  "  that  his  own  soldiers  excelled  in  valor  alone."  4.  Latin,  "at 
one  time." 


88  LATIN    COMI'OSITION 

LESSON   LXXVII 

321.  The  Participle.  —  §  488  (2S9) ;  II.  636  (548);  II-B.  599.  a,b,c. 

322.  Tenses.  — §  489-493  (290);  B.  336;  G.  282;  II.  640  (550)- 
II-B.  600.  I,  2,  3,  4;  602.  I,  2. 

323.  Adjective  and  Predicate  Uses.  —  §494.  a,  495,  496  (291,  292); 
B.  337  ;  G.  664  ff.;   II.  637,  638  (549)  ;   II-B.  320,  604.  1-7. 

324.  The  Ablative  Absolute.  —  §419,420(255);  B.  227;  G.  409,  410; 
H.  4S9  (431);  H-B.  421. 

325.  The  tenses  of  the  participles  are  used  with  much  greater 
precision  in  Latin  than  in  English.    For  example,  in  the  sentences — 

a.  The  captives  weeping  begged  for  peace. 

b.  CcEsar  hearing  this  was  mtcch  disturbed. 

the  English  participles  weeping  and  hearing  are  both  present. 
The  Latin  would  use  the  present  participle  in  a,  but  the  perfect 
in  b ;  because  in  a  the  action  of  the  participle  and  of  the  verb  are 
contemporaneous,  but  in  b  the  action  of  the  participle  is  prior  to 
that  of  the  verb,  hence  :  — 

a.  Ca-ptivl  flentes  pacem  petebant. 

b.  His  audtt'ts  Caesar  perturbabatur. 

In  short,  do  not  use  the  present  participle  in  Latin  unless  the 
act  denoted  by  it  is  contemporaneous  with  that  of  the  verb  on 
which  the  participle  depends. 

326.  Observe  that  the  Latin  participle  lacks  \ht pre setit pas- 
sive (e.g.  being  seen)  and  ih.^  perfect  active  (e.g.  having  seen). 

a.  The  present  passive  participle  is  supplied  by  a  clause  with 
dum  or  cum. 

b.  The  perfect  active  participle  is  supplied  — 

1.  In  deponent  verbs  by  the  perfect  passive  participle  with 
active  meaning :  Ccesar,  having  set  07it  —  Caesar  profectus. 

2.  In  other  verbs  by  a  clause  with  cum  or  postquam  or  by  the 
perfect  passive  participle  in  the  ablative  absolute  :  — 


NOUN  AND  ADJECTIVE   FORMS    OF  VERB       89 

'Caesar  cum  legates    convocavisset   (cf. 

CcBsar,  having  called  to-  ■        )• 

^,       7  ■    7      .,         ^     •{  Caesar    postquam     legat5s     convocavit 
irether  his  lieutenants    1 

(cf.  sec.  184.  I). 

[  Caesar  legatis  convocatls. 

327.  The  following  perfect  deponent  participles  are  used  like 
presents : — 

ratus,  thhiking.  yeritus,  /earing. 

solitus,  deing  wont. 

328.  Use  the  ablative  absolute  only  when  its  substantive  refers 
to  a  person  or  thing  not  elsewhere  mentioned  in  the  same  sentence. 
For  example,  do  not  translate,  Ccesar,  having  captured  the  town, 
burned  it,  by  Caesar,  oppid5  capto,  id  incendit  where  id  and  oppido 
refer  to  the  same  thing,  but  rather  Caesar  oppidum  captum  incendit. 
On  the  other  hand,  in  CcEsar,  having  captured  the  town,  burned 
the  temple,  the  ablative  absolute  may  be  used,  and  we  have  Caesar, 
oppido  capto,  templum  incendit. 

329.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

se  movere  ex  loco.  to  move  from  the  spot. 

fuga  saliitem  petere.  to  seek  safety  ift  fight. 

vindicare  in  aliquem.  to  punish  some  one. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  III.   15,  16 

330.  I.  After  the  yards  had  been  torn  off,  the  ships  could 
not  move  from  the  spot.  2.  The  soldiers  hastened  ^  while 
climbing  into  the  ships  of  the  enemy.  3.  We  saw  the  enemy 
seeking  safety  in  flight.  4.  After  the  business  was  finished, 
very  few  ships  out  of  the  whole  number  reached  the  land. 
5.  The  Romans  took  the  ships  "by  surrounding  them.  6.  The 
Veneti,  ^having  lost  all  their  ships,  surrendered  to  Ccesar, 
7.  *  Since  they  had  gathered  all  their  ships  into  one  place, 
they  thought  that  they  would  be  victorious.  8.  Caisar  will 
not  punish  those  ^that  respect  the   right   of  ambassadors. 


90  LATIN   COMPOSITION 

9.  He  sold  those  inhabilinj;"  the  coast  into  slavery,  10.  Cne- 
sar,  fearing  tiie  treachery'  of  the  barbarians,  punished  tlieiu 
more  severely. 

I.  Ties.  part,  expressing  time.  2.  Pres.  part,  expressing  means.  3.  Cf. 
sec.  326.  4.  Express  this  causal  clause  by  a  participial  phrase  in  the 
abl.  abs.     5.   Express  by  a  participial  clause.     6.  incolere.     7.  perfidia. 


LESSON   LXXVIII 
The  Future  Passive  Participle  (Gerundive) 

331.  Denoting  Purpose.  —  §  500.  4  (294.  d) ;  E.  337.  7.  b).  2) ;  G.  430  ; 
H.  622  (544.  N.  2) ;  H-B.  605.  2. 

332.  The  Second  Periphrastic  Conjugation.  —  §194./';  196,  500.  2 
(129,294.^);  B.  115;  G.  251;  11.237(234);  II-B.  162,  600.  3. 

333.  The  Dative  of  Agent. —  §  374.  a  (232);  B.  189;  G.  354,  355; 
H.  431  (3SS);  11-15.373.1,2. 

334.  The  second  periphrastic  conjugation  is  always  passive. 
Therefore,  to  express  duly  or  necessity  by  means  of  this  construc- 
tion, the  sentence  must  first  be  cast  in  the  passive  form,  if  it  is 
not  so  expressed  already.  For  example,  to  translate  Ctesar  must 
give  the  signal,  we  first  recast  to  the  signal  must  be  given  by 
Ccesarj  Latin  :  Caesari  signum  dandum  est. 

335.  Bear  in  mind  that  the  gerundive  of  an  intransitive  verb  is 
neuter  (impersonal),  and  that  the  object,  if  there  be  one,  will  be 
in  the  case  regularly  governed  by  the  verb ;  e.g.  eis  persuadendum 
est,  they  must  be  persuaded. 

336.  The  gerundive  of  purpose  agreeing  with  the  object  is 
used  in  Ccesar  after  the  verbs  ciiro,  do,  and  trado. 

337.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 
studium  praedandi.  love  of  plunder. 
in  contemptionem  venire.  to  incur  contempt. 
piignandi  potestas.                              an  opportunity  for  battle. 


NOUN  AND  ADJECTIVE   FORMS    OF  VERB       91 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  III.   17 

338.  I.  ^ After  receiving  his  troops  from  Caesar,  Sabinus 
hastened  into  the  territory  of  the  Venelli.  2.  Viridovix  ^saw 
•io  collecting  an  army  from  the  states  that  had  revolted. 
5.  The  Aulerci  surrendered^  their  senate  to  be  slain. 
4..  Closing  our  gates,  let  us  join*  Viridovix.  5.  They  killed 
those  unwilling  to  be  instigators  of  war.  6.  We^  must  call 
them  from  their  daily  toil  by  the  love  of  plunder.  7.  Sabinus 
thought  he  ought  ^to  incur  the  contempt  of  the  enemy.  8.  I 
ought  not  to  fight  with  so  great  a  multitude  while  Caesar  is 
absent.  9.  The  soldiers  could  see  the  enemy  approaching 
even  to  the  rampart  of  the  camp.  10.  Sabinus '^  ought  to 
lead  forth  his  troops  and  give  an  opportunity  for  battle. 

I.  Abl.  abs.  2.  euro.  3.  trad5.  4.  Latin,  "join  ourselves  with." 
5.  Dative  of  agent,  if  expressed  at  all.  6.  Impersonal  because  intransi- 
tive, cf.  sec.  335.     7.  Dative  of  agent. 

LESSON  LXXIX 
The  Gerund  and  Gerundive 

339.  General  Rules.  —  §  501-503.  N.  i.  a  (295,  296.  N. ;  297)  ;  B.  339  j 
G.  425-427  ;  H.  623-625  (541,  543);  H-B.  609-612,  613. 

340.  The  Genitive.  —  §  504.  a,  b  (298) ;  B.  338.  i  ;  339  ;  G.  428  ;  H.  626 
(542.  I;  543  ff.);  H-B.  612.  I. 

341.  The  Dative.  —  §  505.  a  (299);  B.  338.  2  ;  339;  G.  429;  H.  627 
(542.  II;  543  ff.);  H-B.  612.  I,  II. 

342.  The  following  essential  points  of  difference  between 
the  gerund  and  gerundive  may  be  of  service  to  beginners  :  — 

1 .  The  gerund  is  a  verbal  noun,  the  gerundive  a  verbal  adjective. 

2.  The  gerund,  being  a  verbal  noun,  may  stand  alone  or  with 
an  object. 

3.  The  gerundive  as  a  verbal  adjective  is  used  only  in  agree- 
ment with  a  noun. 


92  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

4.  As  a  rule,  only  the  genitive  of  the  gerund  and  the  ablative 
without  a  preposition  admit  a  direct  object.  In  other  cases,  and 
often  in  tlicse,  the  gerundive  construction  is  preferred. 

5.  To  change  a  gerund  witli  a  direct  object  into  the  correspond- 
ing gerundive  construction,  put  the  direct  object  into  the  case  of 
the  gerund,  and  use  the  gerundive  in  adjective  agreement  with  it. 

343.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

se  castris  tenere.  to  keep  one^s  self  in  camp. 

negotium  bene  gerere.  io  carry  on  a   juatter  success- 

fully. 
pro  perfuga.  as  a  deserter. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  III.  18 

344.  I.  He  kept  himself  in  camp  Ho  confirm  the  impres- 
sion of  fear.  2,  He  chooses  a  crafty  man  well  fitted  ^to 
carry  out  the  matter  successfully.  3.  We  ought  to  persuade' 
him  to  go  over  to  the  enemy  as  a  deserter.  4.  He  came 
to  them  *to  set  forth  the  fear  of  the  Romans.  5.  He  showed 
them  that  Caesar  was  hard  pressed  by  the  Veneti.  6.  He 
said  that  Sabinus  was  desirous^  of  secretly  leading  out  his 
army  the  next  night.  7.  We  ought  not  to  lose  this  favorable 
opportunity  of  going  to  the  camp.  8.  Ccesar  says  that  men 
generally  gladly  believe  that  which  they  wish.  9.  War  ought 
not  to  be  waged  before  provisions  have  been  carefully  pro- 
vided. 10.  ^After  the  council  was  dismissed,  they  collected 
fagots  suitable"  for  filling  the  Roman  ditches. 

I.  Gen.  of  the  gerund  with  causa.  2.  The  dative  of  the  gerund  should 
not  be  used  with  a  direct  object.  Use  the  gerundive  instead.  3.  Imper- 
sonal, because  intransitive.  4.  Express  by  the  gerundive  with  causa. 
5.  cupidus  with  the  gen.     6.  Abl.  abs.     7.  aptus  with  the  dative. 


NOUN  AND  ADJECTIVE   FORMS   OF  VERB       93 
LESSON  LXXX 

345.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

eodem  fere  tempore.  at  about  the  same  time. 

bellum  gerendi  causa.  to  wage  war. 

paucis  ante  annis.  a  few  years  before. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  III.  19,  20 

346.  Sabinus,  having  given  the  signal  to  his  ^  eager  men, 
suddenly  made  a  sally  from  two  gates,  and,  pursuing  with 
unimpaired  strength  the  enemy  '^who  were  breathless  with 
running,  killed  a  great  number  of  them  and  left  the  pursuit? 
of  the  rest  to  the  cavalry.  About  the  same  time  Crassus 
arrived  in  Aquitania  to  wage  war  in  those  places  where,  a 
few  years  before,  an  army  had  been  defeated  and  its  baggage 
lost.  For  this  reason  he  saw  tha:t  he  would  have  to  use 
extraordinary  care,  see  to  a  grain-supply,*  and  prepare^ 
cavalry  and  auxiliaries.  When  his  arrival  vi^as  known,  the 
Sotiates  were  desirous''  of  engaging  in  a  cavalry  battle. 

I.  Latin,  "the  ones  desiring."  2.  Express  by  a  participial  clause. 
3.  Gerundive  of  purpose.  4.  res  frumentaria.  5.  For  the  agreement  of 
this  participle  in  gender,  cf.  sec.  34.     6.  cupidus  with  the  genitive. 

LESSON  LXXXI 

The  Gerund  and  Gerundive 

347.  The  Accusative. —  §  506  (300);  B.  338.3;  339;  G.  430,  432; 
H.  628  {542.  Ill;  543  ff.);  H-B.  612.  III. 

348.  The  Ablative. —  §  507  {301);  B.  338.  4;  339;  G.  431,  433; 
H.  629-631  (542.  IV;  543  ff.)  ;  H-B.  612.  IV. 

349.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

ex  itinere.  in  the  course  of  one'' s  march. 

in  deditionem  recipere.  to  receive  in  surrender. 


94  LATIN   COMPOSITION 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  III,  21,  22 

350.  I.  The  Sotiates  attempted  to  conquer  by  fighting 
long  and  bravely.  2.  Our  men  are  desirous  of  showing' 
what  they  can  do  without  the  general.  3.  Crassus  thought 
that  he  ought  to  besiege  a  town  in  the  course  of  his  march. 
4.  They  resisted  bravely  by  attempting  sallies.  5.  The  Aqui- 
tani  were  by  far  the  most  skillful  in  running  mines.  6.  They 
send  ambassadors  to  Crassus  to  beg  fcr  peace.  7.  They 
were  received  in  surrender  on  giving  up  their  arms.  8.  Caesar 
says  that  Adiatunnus  had  six  hundred  devoted  followers  who 
are  called  soldurii.  g.  If  they  wish  to  enjoy  all  the  blessings 
of  life  with  these,  they  must  endure  the  same  fate.  10.  The 
soldiers  drove  Adiatunnus  back  into  the  city  by  rushing  to 
arms  and  attacking  him. 

I.  Genitive  of  the  gerund  of  ostendere. 

LESSON  LXXXII 

The  Supine 

351.  The  Supine  in  -um.  —  §  509  (302);  B.  340;  G.  435;  H.  633 
(546) ;  H-B.  618. 

352.  The  Supine  in  -u. — §510  (303);  B.  340.  2;  G.  436;  H.  635 
(547);  H-B.  619. 

353.  In  Ca;sar  the  supine  in  -um  occurs  after  mitto,  venio,  con- 
veni5,  and  conloco. 

354.  In  Caesar  the  supine  in  -ii  occurs  but  four  times;  twice 
after  perfacile  {very  easy),  once  each  after  optimum  (desi)  and 
horridior  {jnore  frightftil). 

355.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

bellum  inferre  alicui.  to  7>iake  tvar  upon  some  one. 

scientia  rei  mHitaris.  skill  in  tnilitary  affairs. 


SYNTAX   OF  PRONOUNS  95 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  III.  23 

356.  I.  The  Sotiates  obtained  peace  by  surrendering  arms 
and  giving  hostages.  2.  Crassus  set  out  to  make  war  upon 
the  Vocates.  3.  The  town  was  stormed  a  few  days  after  (his) 
arrival  there.  4.  The  barbarians  ^made  a  compact,  gave^ 
hostages  to  each  other,  and  prepared  ^  troops.  5.  This  seems 
best  to  do.  6.  They  sent  ambassadors  to  other  states  to  sum- 
mon aid.  7.  Generals  were  chosen  ^to  carry  on  the  war. 
8.  This  was  easy  to  do  because  many  had  very  great  skill  in 
military  affairs.  9.  These  had  been  with  Sertorius  and  were 
very  skillful  ^in  fortifying  a  camp.  10,  I  perceive  that  the 
number  of  the  enemy  is  increasing  daily.  11.  I  think  that  I 
ought  not  to  delay  in  bringing  this  matter  before  the  council. 

I.  Historical  infin.  2.  Express  the  purpose  by  ad  and  the  gerundive. 
3.  Gen.  of  the  gerund. 

IX.     SYNTAX  OF  PRONOUNS 
LESSON  LXXXIII 

357.  Personal  Pronouns.  —  §  295  (194);  B.  242;  G.  304;  H.  500 
(446) ;  H-B.  254,  255,  257. 

358.  Possessive  Pronouns.  —  §  302.  a,  <r,  </,  <•  (197) ;  B.  243;  G.  312; 
H.  501  (447);  H-B.  256,  258. 

359.  Reflexive  Pronouns.  —  §  299.  a;  300.  i,  2  (196);  B.  244;  G.  309; 
H.  502-504  (448,  449);  H-B.  260;  262.  I,  2. 

360.  When,  in  a  subordinate  clause,  we  wish  to  refer  back  to 
the  subject  of  the  principal  sentence,  and  for  any  reason  the  use 
of  se  would  lead  to  ambiguity,  we  use  ipse. 

361.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

prima  luce.  at  dawn. 

victoria  sine  volnere.  a  bloodless  victory. 

8UU8  quisque.  each  one  his  own. 


96  LATIN   COMPOSITION 

F(iR  Oral  Translation  —  Book  III.  24,  25 

362.  I.  At  dawn  Crassus  led  forth  all  his  own^  forces, 
2.  Do  you'^  draw  up  the  line  of  battle.  P  will  '^wait  and  see 
what  plan  the  enemy  adopt.  3.  Crassus,  we  think  that  we 
shall  fight  safely  because  of  the  fewness  of  your  (men). 
4.  The  enemy  think  that  they  will  win  a  bloodless  victory 
on  account  of  the  scarcity  of  grain.  5.  Although  the  Roman 
commanders  have  led  forth  each  his  own  forces,  we  shall 
remain  in  camp.  6.  Did  not  the  enemy  fear  that*  they 
would  make  our  soldiers  more  eager  by  their  delay?  7.  ^We 
expressed  the  opinion  unanimously  that  there  ought  to  be 
no  more  delay.  8.  I  will  urge  my  men  to  fill  the  ditches. 
9.  The  auxiliaries  were  more  useful^  for  supplying  stones 
and  weapons  than  for  fighting.  10.  Crassus  sent  horsemen 
"to  go  around  the  camp.  11.  Who  of  you  desires  to  drive 
away  the  defenders  from  the  rear  gate  ? 

I.  Gen.  of  ipse.  2.  Emphatic  by  contrast.  3.  "wait  and  see,"  ex- 
press by  one  word.  4.  ut  or  ne?  5.  Latin,  "the  voices  of  us  all  were 
heard,"  etc.     6.  utilis.     7.  Supine  of  purpose. 

LESSON   LXXXIV 

363.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

intritus  ab  labors.  unwearied   by   toil   (lit.  from 

toil). 
intentus  ad  pugnam.  intent  upon  the  battle. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  III.  26,  27 

364.  I  will  show  you  what  I  wish  done.  Spur  on  your 
horsemen  by  giving  them  great  rewards.  Take  with  you 
those  cohorts  which  are  unwearied  by  toil,  and  lead  them 
around  by  a  longer  route,  that  they  may  not  be  seen  by  the 


SYNTAX   OF   PRONOUNS  97 

enemy.  When  you  have  arrived  at  those  fortifications  which 
I  have  mentioned,  quickly  demolish  them  and  occupy  the 
enemy's  camp  before  they  can  find  out  what  is  going  on. 
This  will  not  be  hard  to  do,  for  the  eyes  and  minds  of  all 
will  be  intent^  upon  the  battle.  Then  we  on  the  other ^ 
side,  trusting  to  your  victory,  will  surround  the  enemy  on 
every  side  and  pursue   them  ^as  they  seek  safety  in  flight. 

I.  What  gender?  Cf.  sec.  34.  2.  alter.  3.  Express  by  a  participial 
clause. 

LESSON    LXXXV 

365.  Relative  Pronouns.  —  §  304-307.  rt,/^.N. ;  (t;  3oS.(7,<r(i97.  5 — 201); 
B.  250,  251  ;  G.  610  ff.;  H.  510  (453);  H-B.  281,  282,  284,  1-6. 

366.  Interrogative  Pronouns.  —  §  333  (104);  B.  90;  G.  106;  H.  511 
(454);  H-B.  275. 

367.  Indefinite  Pronouns.  —  §309,  310.  «;  311,  313,  314.  i,  2.  «  (202) ; 
B.  252;  G.  313-319;  H.  512-515  (455-459);  H-B.  276. 

368.  The  relative  pronoun  cannot  be  omitted  in  Latin,  as  it  often 
is  in  English  in  phrases  like  the  bridge  you  are  buildifig.  In  Latin 
the  relative  is  always  expressed,  and  we  have^^wj  c^^Ta.facis. 

369.  Of  the  indefinite  pronouns,  quis  is  the  least  definite  and 
quidam  the  most  definite.  The  commoner  ones,  with  their  mean- 
ings and  uses,  are  — 

quis,  some  one,  atty  one,  never  stands  first  in  its  clause,  and 
usually  follows  si,  nisi,  ne,  or  num. 

aliquis,  so>ne  one,  any  otie,  more  definite  than  quis. 

quisquam  (substantive),  any  one,  uUus  (adjective),  any,  used 
chiefly  in  negative  sentences  or  such  as  imply  a  negative. 

quivis  or  quilibet,  atty  one  you  please. 

quisque,  each  (to  be  distinguished  from  uterque,  each  of  two), 
follows  the  word  to  which  it  belongs  and  is  often  used  with  the 
superlative  ;  e.g.  optimus  quisque,  every  good  tnan  or  all  the  best 
men. 

quidam,  a,  a  certain,  implies  a  definite  knowledge. 


98  LATIN   COMPOSITION 

370.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

longc  alia  ratione  ac.  in  a  far  different  manner  from, 

quao  cum  ita  sint.  since  this  is  so. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  III.  28,  29 

371.  1.  Ca'sar  led  his  army  against  the  Morini,  ^a  state 
which  had  never  sent  hostages.  2.  If  any  one  thinks  that 
that  war  can  be  quickly  finished,  he  ^is  mistaken.  3.  Cer- 
tain tribes  carry  on  war  in  a  far  different  manner  from  the 
rest  of  the  Gauls.  4.  They  withdraw  themselves  and  all  their 
possessions  to  the  forests  and  swamps.  5.  Neither  can 
any  one  see  the  enemy,  nor  follow  them,  in  the  more  difficult 
places.  6.  But  they  attack  the  Romans  without  any  danger. 
7.  Who  will  seize  his  arms  and  drive  the  enemy  back  into 
the  woods  ?  8.  Since  this^  is  so,  Caesar  will  fell  the  forests, 
g.  He  will  pile  up  for  a  rampart  all  the  timber  that  he  cuts. 
I  o.  After  a  great  space  had  been  cleared,  something  happened* 
of  such  a  nature  that  the  work  was  stopped.  11.  Some  vil- 
lages and  buildings  which  the  enemy  had  were  burned.  12.  Cae- 
sar stationed  his  legions  each  in  its  own  winter  quarters. 

I.  Remember  that  an  antecedent  which  is  an  appositive  is  incorporated 
in  the  reL  clause.     2.  errare.     3.   ReL  for  demonstrative.     4.  accidere. 

LESSON  LXXXVI 

372.  Demonstrative  Pronouns.  —  §296,  297,  298  (100-102,  195);  B. 
246-249;  G.  305-311  ;  II.  505-507  (450-452);  II-B.  271-274,  267-270. 

373.  atlus  and  a/ter.  —  ^  315  (203);  B.  253.  1-3;  G.  319;  II.  516 
(459)  ;  II-B.  279. 

374.  Hie,  iste,  and  ille  always  point  out  definitely  in  place  or 
time.  Their  relation  to  the  speaker  may  be  represented  graph- 
ically thus  :  — 


SYNTAX  OF   PRONOUNS  99 

hic  iste  ille 

Speaker > > > 

this  (near)  that  (remote)  that  (more  remote) 

The  pronoun  is  is  used  of  things  either  far  or  near  and  makes  no 
definite  reference  to  place  or  time.  As  a  substantive  it  is  com- 
monly used  as  a  pronoun  of  the  third  person  {he,  she,  it),  and  is 
often  found  as  the  antecedent  of  a  relative. 

375.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

maximam  partem.  for  the  most  part. 

multum  sunt  in.  spend  jnuch  time  in. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.  i 

376.  I.  Caesar  waged  many  wars,  some  in  Gaul  and  others 
in  Africa  and  Spain.  2.  Concerning  the  man^  himself,  one 
thinks  one  thing,  another  another.  3.  In  that  year  Pompey 
and  Crassus  were  consuls,  of  whom  the  former  was  a  famous 
general,  the  latter  very  rich.^  4.  Caesar  heard  that  the  Ger- 
mans had  crossed  the  Rhine  for  some  reason.  5.  He  was 
not  ^the  man  to  fear  them.  6.  The  Suevi  and  Usipetes  were 
German  tribes.  7.  The  one  oppressed  the  other  and  kept 
it*  from  agriculture.  8.  The  Suevi  lead  out  yearly  one  hun- 
dred thousand  armed  men  for  war.  9.  These ^  are  supported 
by  those  that  stay  at  home.  10.  They  live  for  the  most  part 
on  milk.  11.  They  likewise"  spend  much  time  in  hunting. 
12.  ''Not  even  in  their  extreme  climate  do  they  wear  any 
clothing  except  skins.  13.  This^  method  of  life  makes 
them  men  of  great  size.  14.  Casar  says  something  about 
the  customs  of  the  Suevi.  15.  Does  he  say  anything  about 
the  others  'i 

I.  is.  2.  dives.  3.  is  qui.  Cf.  sec.  145.  4.  Omit.  5.  Masc.  refer- 
ring to  men.  6.  idem.  7.  ne  .  .  .  quidem,  with  the  emphatic  word  bfr 
tween  them.     8.  Relative  for  demonstrative. 


lOO  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

X.     SYNTAX   OF   NOUNS 

LKSSON    LXXXVII 

Expressions  of  Time 

377.  Time  When  or  Within  Which.  —  §423,  424.  </,  ^  (256,  259.  (7,  r); 
B.  230,  231  ;  G.  393;  II.  486,  487  (429) ;  H-B.  439. 

378.  Time  How  Long  or  During  Which.  —  §423,  424.  r  (256,  259.  <r); 
B.  iSi;  G.  336;   II.  417  (379);  II-B.3S7.  II. 

379.  Use  of  Prepositions  in  Expressions  of  Time.  —  §  424.  a,  e  (256.  a  ; 
259.^);  B.  181.  2;  230.2;  G.  336,  394;  \l.  487.1,2  (429.1,2);  II-B. 
439-  ^ ;  387-  II.  a. 

380.  Time  Before  or  After  an  Event.  —  §  424./ (259.  </) ;  B.  357.  i ; 
G-  Zl)^-  3;  4°3-  4;  II-  4SS.  I,  2,  note  2  (430,  note  i.  i)-3);  note  3); 
H-B.  424;  387.  U.b. 

381.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

bellum  gerere.  to  wage,  or  carry  on,  war. 

una  ex  parte.  on  one  side. 

For  Oral  Translation — Book  IV.  2,  3 

382.  I.  Pompey  was  consul  in  the  fifty-fifth^  year  before 
Christ.^  2.  At  that  time  Ctesar  was  carrying  on  war  in 
Gaul.  3.  Two  years  later  Crassus  was  killed  in  his  province. 
4.  The  Gauls  were  subdued  by  Caesar  in  eight  years.  5.  In 
the  fourth  year  he  made  his  first  inroad^  upon  the  territory 
of  the  Germans.  6.  A  few  months  after  he  hastened  to 
Britain.  7.  Caesar  used  the  same  horse  for  many  years. 
8.  The  Germans  do  not  use  saddles,  nor  do  they  regard  any- 
thing as  more  disgraceful.  9.  On  one  side  the  fields  of  the 
Suevi  lie  vacant,  on  the  other  the  Ubii  adjoin.  10.  These 
the  Suevi  had  made  tributary  to  themselves,  but,  *only  a 
few  years  before,  the  state  had  been  rich  and  powerful. 
II.   The   Suevi  would  have   driven   the  Ubii   out  of  thei; 


SYNTAX   OF   NOUNS 


lOI 


territories  if  they  had  been  able.      12.   Neither  in  war  nor  in 
peace  did  the  Germans  allow  themselves  to  become  feeble. 

I.  For  the  numerals  consult  the  table  of  numerals  in  the  grammar, 
2.  Christus,  -i.     3.  incursio.     4.  pauci  means  "  only  a  few." 


LESSON  LXXXVIII 

383.  Review  the  Rules  of  Syntax,  Lessons  lxxiii-lxxxvi. 

384.  Review  the  following  idioms  and  phrases :  — 


aliquem  alicui  rei  praeficere. 

bellum  gerendi  causa. 

bellum  gerere. 

bellum  inferre  alicui. 

eodem  fere  tempore. 

ex  itinera. 

fuga  saliitem  petere. 

hostibus  nocere. 

in  contemptionem  venire. 

in  deditionem  recipere. 

in  extremis  lingulls. 

in  officid  continere. 

intentus  ad  pugnam. 

intritus  ab  labore. 

longe  alia  ratione  ac. 

magnS  iisui  esse. 

maximam  partem. 

multum  sunt  in. 


negotium  bene  gerere. 
niillus  pedibus  aditus. 
paucis  ante  annis. 
per  vim. 
prima  luce, 
pro  perfuga. 
pugnandl  potestas. 
quae  cum  ita  sint. 
rationem  piignae  insistere. 
scientia  rei  militaris. 
se  castrls  tenere. 
se  movere  ex  loco, 
studium  praedandi. 
suus  quisque. 
una  ex  parte, 
victoria  sine  volnere. 
vindicare  in  aliquem. 


For  Written  Translation  —  Book  IV.  4 

385.  The  Usipetes  and  Tencteri,  ^tribes  which  I  have 
mentioned  above,  having  been  driven  out  from  their  terri- 
tory, wandered  about  for  three  years,  but  finally  reached  the 
villages  of  the  Menapii,  some  of  which  were  on  one  bank 
of  the  Rhine  and  others  on  the  other.     But  the  Menapii, 


I02  LATIN   COMPOSITION 

being  terrified  by  the  approach  of  so  grea.t  a  multitude, 
crossed  the  river  before  the  enemy  appeared,^  and  by  setting 
guards  prevented  the  Germans  from  crossing.  ^The  Ger- 
mans after  trying  ■*  in  vain  for  several  days,  —  since  they  had 
no  ships  and  could  not  surprise  the  guards,  —  in  order  that 
they  might  destroy  the  Menapii  by  a  sudden^  attack,  pre- 
tended that  they  were  returning  to  their  own  settlements. 
Making  a  journey  of  three  days  in  a  single  night,  they  "fell 
upon  their  unsuspecting  foes,  killed  them,  seized  their  ships, 
crossed  the  river,  and  supported  themselves  on  the  captured 
supplies  the  rest  of  the  winter. 

I.  Cf.  sec.  371,  note  i.  2.  Pass,  of  video.  3.  illi,  place  first  in  the 
sentence.     4.  frustra.     5.  subitus,  -a,  -um.     6.  adoiior. 

LESSON    LXXXIX 
Expressions  of  Place 

386.  Place  From  Which.  — §426.  i;  427.  i;  428. 3,  ^,7(258.  a);  B.  229; 
G.  390,  391  ;  H.  461,  462.  I,  4  (412. 1,  II.  i);  H-B.  409,  451. 

387.  Place  To  Which. —  §  426.  2;  427.  2;  428.  d,  c  (258.^);  B.  182. 
I,  2  ;  G.  337.  1-3 ;  H.  418.  4  (380.  I,  II.  I) ;  H-B.  385,  450. 

388.  PlaceTowardsWhich.  — §428.  a,  f  (258.^.  N.2;f.  2.N.  i);  B.  182. 
3 ;  G.  337.  4 ;  H.  418.  4 ;  462.  3  (380.  i  ;  412.  3.  n.)  ;  H-B.  453. 

389.  Place  At  or  In  Which.  —  §  426.  3;  427.  3;  428.  i,  d.  N.  i  (258. 
cf) ;  B.  228  ;  G.  385-387  ;  H.  483,  485-  i  (425- 1,  H-  2) ;  H-B.  436,  449- 

390.  Place  By,  Through,  or  Over  Which.  —  §  429.  a  (258.^) ;  B.  218.  9; 
G.  389;   H.  476  (420.  3)) ;   H-B.  426. 

391.  Words  Used  Like  Names  of  Towns.  —  §  427.  a ;  429.  i,  2  (258.  c. 
R. ;  d,f.i,2);  B.  22%.  i.b),c);  G.  385.  N.  i  ;  388;  H.  419.  I ;  462.4; 
484.  1,2  (380.  II.  2.  i),  2)  ;  412.  I  ;  426.  I,  2);  H-B.  449.  a;  436.  a,  3. 

392.  The  Locative  Case.  —  §  427.  ftn.  i  (258.  c.  2;  d,  e)\  B.  232; 
G.  41  r ;  H.  78.  4  ;  83.  4  ;  108  (48.  4  ;  51.  8 ;  66.  4) ;  H-B.  449. 

393.  Summary  of  Place  Relations.  —  §  426,  427;  H.  491.  I,  II  (427, 
428). 


SYNTAX   OF   NOUNS  1O3 

394.  Apply  as  a  general  principle  the  rule  that  the  relations  of 
place  are  expressed  by  prepositions  with  their  j^roper  cases,  but 
that  names  of  towns  and  domus  and  riis  omit  the  preposition. 

395.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

terra  marique.  by  land  and  sea. 

domi  militiaeque.  at  home  and  in  the  field. 

aliquem  alicQius  rei  in  vestigio       some  one  repents  of  something 
paenitere.  on  the  spot. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.  5,  6 

396.  I.  Csesar  waged  war  against  the  Gauls  by  land  and 
sea  for  many  years.  2.  He  was  illustrious^  both  at  home 
and  in  the  field.  3.  He  was  killed  at  Rome  by  those  who 
a  few  years  before  had  been  his  friends.  4.  During  the 
winter  before  the  war  against  the  Germans,  Caesar  had  been 
in  Italy.  5.  From  Italy  to  Germany  is  a  long  journey. 
6.  The  Gauls  are  so*^  quick  in  making  plans  that  they  must 
needs  repent  of  them  on  the  spot.  7.  In  the  towns  the 
Gauls  surround  travelers  to  ask  what  each  one  of  them  has 
heard  about  each  thing.  8.  Caesar  set  out  for  his  army  early 
because  he  feared  that  the  Gauls  were  sending  embassies 
to  the  Germans.  9.  The  army  ^had  passed  the  winter  not 
far  from  the  sea  in  the  states  which  had  last*  made  war. 
10.  ^  Don't  invite  the  Germans  to  leave  the  Rhine.  11.  If 
they  wander  too  widely,  they  will  never  return  home. 
12.  Caesar  will  not  return  to  Rome  until  he  conquers  them. 

I.  clarus,  -a,  -um.  2.  tam,  as  usual  with  adjectives  and  adverbs. 
3.  hiemo.     4.  proxime.     5.  Cf.  sec.  99. 


104  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

LESSON    XC 
The  Genitive  with  Nouns 

397.  General  Rules. —  §  342  (213);  II.  437-439(393-395):  ^I"'^-  337 

398.  Possessive  Genitive.  —  §  343  {214.  i) ;  B.  198;  G.  362;  II.  440.  i 
(396.  I);   II-B.  339..!,^ 

399.  Genitive  of  Material. — §  344  (214.  2) ;  B.  197  ;  H-B.  349. 

400.  Genitive  of  Quality.  —  §  345  (215);  B.  203;  G.  365;  H.  440.  3 
(396.  V);  H-B.  355. 

401.  The  Subjective  Genitive.  —  §343-  N.  i  (214);  B.  199;  G.  363; 
H.  440.  I  (396-11);  H-B.  344. 

402.  Partitive  Genitive.  —  §346(216);  B.  201  ;  G.  367-372  ;  II.  440.  5; 
441-444  (397-  «•  1-4  ;  '^.  'f) ;  H-B.  346.  c. 

403.  The  Objective  Genitive.  —  §  348  (217);  B.  200 ;  G.  363.  2; 
11.440.2(396.  Ill);  H-B.  354. 

404.  The  dependence  of  one  noun  upon  another  is  usually 
expressed  by  the  genitive.  As  a  rule  this  relationship  should  not 
be  expressed  in  Latin  by  a  preposition,  thus  making  the  preposi- 
tion a  sort  of  conjunction  between  the  two  nouns.  Such  forms  of 
expression  are  common  enough  in  English,  but  in  Latin  the  genitive 
or  some  other  construction  is  preferred.  For  example,  we  say  //le 
war  against  the  Cauls;  the  Romans  would  say  Bellitm  Gallorutn 
or  Bellum  Gallicum  or  Bellum  in  Gallos  gestum. 

405.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

parem  esse  alicui.  to  be  a  match  for  sotnc  one. 

mnie  passus.  a  mile  (lit.  a  thousand  paces'). 

multa  mflia  passuum.  many  miles  (\\t.  many  thousands 

of  paces') . 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.  7,  8 

406.  I.  What  plan^  did  Caesar  have?  2.  He  made  a 
march  of  a  few  days  into  those  regions  where '^  he  heard  the 


SYNTAX   OF   NOUNS  10$ 

Germans  were.  3.  The  Germans  were  (men)  of  the  great- 
est valor.  4.  Ambassadors  came  from  them  to  Caesar.  5.  It 
is  a  custom  of  the  Germans  not  to  refuse  to  resist  those  who 
make  war  upon  them.  6.  This  tribe  of  Germans  had  been 
driven  from  home  by  fear  of  the  Suevi.  7.  The  Rhine  is 
the  largest  river  of  Germany.  8.  It  is  many  miles  long  and 
twenty  feet^  deep.  9.  The  friendship  of  the  Germans  might 
be  of  great ■*  (value)  to  Caesar.  10.  The  Suevi  were  the  only 
ones  of^  all  the  Germans  whom  they  could''  not  conquer. 
II.  They  were  a  match  for  alF  of  the  others.  12.  You  may 
settle  in  the  territory  of  the  Ubii  if  you  choose.  13.  The 
ambassadors  of  the  Ubii  are  complaining  about  the  wrongs 
of  the  Suevi. 

I.  Partitive  genitive.  2.  Cf.  text.  3.  Genitive  of  measure.  4.  Geni- 
tive of  value.  5.  ex,  rather  than  the  partitive  genitive.  Why  ?  6.  Sub- 
junctive of  characteristic.  7.  Remember  that  with  omnes  the  partitive 
genitive  is  not  used. 

LESSON  XCI 

407.  The  Genitive  in  Apposition  with  a  Possessive  Pronoun.  —  §  302.  e 
(184.^);  B.  243.  3.  a;  G.  321.  2;  H.  393.  6  (363.  4.  I);  H-B.  339.  ^. 

408.  Predicate  Genitive  after  esse.  —  §  314.3  (214.  i.r);  B.  198.  3; 
203.  5;  G.  366;  H.  447  ff.  (401  ff.) ;  H-B.  340. 

409.  Genitive  with  Adjectives.  —  §  349.  a-c  (218);  B.  204;  G.  374; 
H.  450  ff.  (399)  ;  H-B.  354. 

410.  In  Cassar  the  genitive  occurs  after  the  adjectives  peritus, 
imperitus,  cupidus,  insuetus,  plenus,  and  conscius. 

411.  IDIOMS   AND  PHRASES 

peritus  rei  militaris.  skillful  in  military  affairs. 

ahquot  diebus  ante.  several  days  before. 

longo  spatio  fluere.  to  flow  over  a  long  course. 


I06  LATIN   COMPOSITION 

F(iR  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.  9,   10 

412.  1.  It  WIS  ^of  great  (importance)  to  Ca;sar  to  over- 
come the  Germans.  2.  ^It  was  the  duty  of  the  ambassadors 
to  report  to  their  people  what^  Ca;sar  had  said.  3.  Of  all 
the  Germans  the  tribe  of  the  Suevi  is  the  most  skillful  in 
military  affairs.  4.  The  ambassadors  will  return  three  days 
later.  5.  A  large  part  of  the  cavalry  had  been  sent  across 
the  Meuse  several  days  before  to  plunder.  6.  They  were 
desirous*  of  interposing  delay  until  the  cavalry  should 
return.  7.  The  Meuse  is  of  great  depth '^  and  is  always 
full"  of  water.  8.  The  Rhine  flows ^  over  a  long  course 
through  the  territory  of  many  tribes.  9.  But  the  Germans 
consider®  the  Rhine  their  own"  river.  10.  Don't  move  the 
camp  nearer  to  us.  11.  The  Rhine,  like  the  Nile,^°  flows 
into  the  sea  by  many  mouths.      12.  The  river  is  full  of  fish. 

I.  Pred.  gen.  of  value.  2.  Latin,  "it  was  of  the  ambassadors." 
3.  Latin,  "  those  (things)  which."  4.  cupidus,-a, -um.  5.  altitudd.  6.  ple- 
nus, -a, -um.  7.  Latin,  "is  carried."  8.  habere.  9.  Appositional  gen. 
of  ipse.     10.  NIlus,  -I. 

LESSON   XCII 

413.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

post  diem  tertium.  after  three  days. 

ut  erat  constitutum.  as  had  been  agreed  upon. 

aquationis  causa.  for  the  sake  of  getting  water. 

potestatem  facere.  to  give  permission. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  IV.   1 1 

414.  When  the  ambassadors^  had  returned  to  Caesar  after 
three  days,  as  had  been  agreed  upon,  they  were  full  of  fear 
because  he  was^  no  more  than  twelve  miles  distant  from 
their  camp,  and  begged  him  not  to  approach  nearer.    Caesar 


SYNTAX   OF   NOUNS  IO7 

said  that  he  would  not  proceed  more  than  four  miles  that 
day  for  the  purpose  of  getting  water,  and  that,  if  they  were 
desirous  of  sending  ambassadors  to  the  Ubii  with  reference 
to  those  terms  that  he  had  proposed,  he  would  give  them^ 
permission.  They  asked  for  three  days  time,  which  Caesar 
granted,  although  he  knew  that  reasons  for  delay ^  would  be 
given  ^  until  their  cavalry  had  returned. 

I.  Place  first.  Why?  2.  Indie,  or  subjv.  or  either.''  3.  Why  not 
sibi  as  in  the  text?  4.  Objective  gen.  5.  Latin,  "shown."  Use  the 
usual  circumlocution  for  the  fut.  pass,  infin. 

LESSON  XCIII 
The  Genitive  with  Verbs 

415.  With  Verbs  of  Remembering  and  Forgetting.  —  §  350,351  (219); 
B.  206;  G.  376;  H.  454,  455  (406.  II);  H-B.  350,  351. 

416.  With  Verbs  of  Judicial  Action.  — §  352  (220);  B.  208;  G.  378; 
H.  456  (409.  II) ;  H-B.  342,  343. 

417.  With  Verbs  of  Feeling  (mostly  Impersonal). —  §  354  (221); 
B.  209;  G.  377;  H.  457  (406.  I;  409.  Ill);  H-B.  352. 

418.  With  interest  and  refert.—  %  355  (222);  B.  210  ff. ;  G.  381 ; 
H.  449  (406.  Ill)  ;  H-B.  345. 

419.  With  Verbs  of  Plenty  and  Want.  —  §  356  (223) ;  B.  212  ;  G.  383 ; 
H.  458  (410.  V.  I);  H-B.  347. 

420.  IDIOMS   AND   PHRASES 

magnl  hostium  interest  (refert).      it  is  of  great  importance  to,  or  // 

greatly  concerns,  the  enemy. 
magni  mea  interest  (refert).  it  greatly  concertts  tne. 

resistere  alicui.  to  resist  some  one. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.   12 

421.  I.  The  enemy  attacked  our  horsemen  as  soon  as  they 
saw  them.     2,  ^They  were  not  ashamed  of  this,  although 


jo8  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

that  day  had  been  asked  for  a  truce.  3.  For  this  reason 
(.\tsar  accused  them  of  treachery.^  4.  It  <;reatly  concerns 
the    enemy    to   throw    our   (men)    into    confusion    quickly. 

5.  After  our  horses  were  stabbed  we  were  sorry*  that  we 
had  resisted  them.  6.  Caisar  will  not  forget  the  death  of 
his  brave  horsemen.  7.  It  is  of  small  concern  to  me  to 
live  if  I  ■'do  not  rescue  my  brother  from  peril.  8.  If  he 
should  be  killed,  I  should  be  justly*^  accused  of  cowardice.'' 
9.  Mindful  of  my  duty,^  I  will  spur  my  horse  against  the 
enemy.  10.  All  (men)  are  not  like  Piso.  11.  Some  of 
the  soldiers  were  greatly  frightened,  but  a  certain  Piso  was 
very  brave. 

I.  I^tin,  "it  did  not  shame  them  of  this."  2.  perfidia.  3.  paenitet. 
Latin,  "  it  repented  us  that."    4.  P'ut.perf.  in  Latin.    Cf.  sec.  71.    5.  recte. 

6.  Ignavia.     7.  officium. 

LESSON   XCIV 
The  Dative  Case 

422.  General  Rule.  — §  361  (224);  B.  186;  G.  344;  H.  422,  423 
(3S2);  H-B.358. 

423.  The  Indirect  Object. —  §  362.  a\  366  (225,  226);  B.  187;  G.  345, 
346;  H.  424(384);  H-B.  365. 

424.  It  should  be  carefully  noted  that  the  various  constructions 
of  the  dative  with  verbs  all  come  under  the  general  head  of  the 
indirect  object.  Many  intransitive  verbs  take  an  indirect  object 
and  are  therefore  followed  by  the  dative.  Transitive  verbs  take 
a  direct  object  and  are  followed  by  the  accusative,  but  sometimes 
they  have  an  indirect  object  or  dative  as  well.  The  whole  question, 
then,  as  to  whether  or  not  a  certain  verb  takes  the  dative  depends 
upon  its  capacity  for  governing  an  indirect  object.  Remember 
that  English  is  not  a  safe  guide,  for  many  verbs  that  are  transitive 
in  English  are  intransitive  in  Latin,  and  vice  versa. 


SYNTAX   OF   NOUNS  IO9 

425.  When  to  denotes  motion  it  is  never  expressed  by  the 
dative,  but  by  ad  or  in  with  the  accusative :  — 

He  sent  the  soldiers  to  the  town,  militesJ        loppidum  misit. 

Un  J 

426.  In  English  we  may  say  — 

a.  He  gives  the  boy  a  book. 

b.  A  book  is  given  to  the  boy. 

c.  The  boy  is  given  a  book. 

Sentences  a  and  b  are  similarly  expressed  in  Latin,  as,  — 

a.  Puero  librum  dat. 

b.  Liber  puero  datur. 

Observe   that   the  direct  object  of  the  active  verb  becomes  the 
subject  of  the  passive. 

Sentence  c  is  foreign  to  the  Latin  idiom  and  cannot  be  thus 
expressed.  The  indirect  object  of  the  active  cannot  be  used  as 
the  subject  in  the  passive. 

427.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 
non  iam.  no  longer. 
nihil  spati.                                           no  time. 

contra  atque.  contrary  to  what. 

si  quid  possumus.  whatever  we  can. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.  13 

428.  I.  ^Caesar  ought  no  longer  to  listen  to  ambassadors. 
2.  He  cannot  forget  the  treachery  of  the  Germans.  3.  He 
charged  them  with  making'^  war  upon  him  without  provoca- 
tion. 4.  It  is  ^the  height  of  folly  to  wait  until  the  forces  of 
the  enemy  are  increased.  5.  I  will  give  the  enemy  no  time 
for  making  plans.  6.  Do  you  not  perceive  how  much 
prestige  the  enemy  have  won?  7.  The  day  after  that  day 
all  the  elders  came  to  him  to  the  camp.  8.  Csesar  accuses 
the  Germans  of  using ^  deceit.  9.  We  have  come  to  excuse 
ourselves.     10,  The  battle  was  begun,  contrary  to  what  had 


no  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

been  ordered,  ii.  Let  us  obtain  whatever  we  can  in  the 
way  of  a  truce,  12.  The  chief  men  were  placed  in  Caesar's 
power  by  a  very  fortunate  circumstance.  13.  The  cavalry 
had  been  greatly  terrified  a  few  days  before. 

I.  Cf.  sec.  338,  note  7.  2.  Gen.  of  the  gerund.  3.  Pred.  gen.  as  in 
the  text. 

LESSON   XCV 

429.  The  Dative  of  the  Indirect  Object  with  Special  Intransitive  Verbs. 
—  §367(227);  B.  1S7.  II;  G.346;  11.42(^428(385);  H-B.  362.  I-III; 
364.  I. 

430.  The  Dative  with  Passive  Intransitive  Verbs.  —  §  369.  a  ;  372  (230) ; 
B.  1S7.  II.  l>\  G.  20S.  2  ;  346.  I ;  II.  426.  3  (384.  5) ;  H-B.  364.  2. 

431.  The  so-called  special  verbs  that  govern  the  dative  take 
this  construction,  not  because  of  any  arbitrary  rule,  but  because 
from  the  Latin  point  of  view  they  are  intransitive  and  take  an 
indirect  object.  The  English  meaning  is  not  a  safe  guide,  for  it 
sometimes  happens  that  two  Latin  verbs  with  the  same  English 
equivalence  will  be  the  one  transitive,  governing  the  accusative, 
and  the  other  intransitive,  governing  the  dative.  For  example,  the 
Latin  has  the  two  verbs  nocere  and  laedere,  both  translated  to 
injures  but  the  former  is  intransitive  and  the  latter  transitive. 

432.  IDIOMS   AND  PHRASES 
persuadet  omnibus.  he  persuades  all. 
omnibus  persuadetur.                          all  are  persuaded. 
fuga  desperata.  despairing  of  safety. 
apud  Caesarem  remanere.  to  stay  with  CcEsar. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.  14,  15 

433.  I.  Caesar  quickly  finished  a  march  of  eight  miles. 

2.  He  could   not   pardon^  the  treachery  of  the  Germans. 

3.  He  commanded^  his  legions  to  give  the  enemy  time 
neither  for  defending  the  camp  nor  for  seeking  safety  in 


SYNTAX   OF   NOUNS  III 

flight.  4.  It  is  of  great  concern  to  the  enemy  that  they 
seize  their  arms  quickly  and  resist  the  Germans.  5,  The 
Germans  spared^  neither  women  nor  children.  6.  ''All  had 
been  persuaded  ^to  cross  the  Rhine.  7.  Caesar  sent  his 
cavalry  ®to  pursue  them.  8.  Despairing  of  safety,  they 
threw  themselves  into  the  river.  9.  The  Germans  stayed 
with  Caesar  through  fear  of  the  Gauls.  10.  The  Gauls  were 
not  friendly  to  them  because  they  had  '^done  them  harm. 
1 1 .  He  would  not  have  given  them  permission  to  depart, 
if  they  had  been  guilty^  of  treachery.  12.  He  was  not 
ashamed  of  his  cruelty. 

I.  ignoscere.  2.  imperare.  3.  parcere.  4.  Latin,  "it  had  been  per- 
suaded to  all."  5.  Not  infin.  6.  Express  by  the  supine.  7.  nocere. 
8.  noxius,  -a,  -um. 

LESSON   XCVI 

434.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

auxilium  ferre.  to  give  aid. 

magnopere  orare.  to  entreat  earnestly. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  IV.  16 

435.  The  Germans  thought  that  the  Rhine  bounded  the 
power  of  the  Roman  people  and^  that  it  was  not^  right  that 
anything  across  the  river  should  be  under  Roman  authority. 
'^They  had  been  persuaded  that  Caesar  neither  dared  nor 
could  cross  the  Rhine  with  an  army  and^  that  he  would 
not^  give  aid  to  those  that  had  given ^  hostages  and  made* 
friendship.  Even^  at  that  very^  time  ambassadors  ^from  the 
Ubii  were  earnestly  entreating  him  to  take  his  army  across 
'^  because  the  Suevi  were  making  war  upon  them.*  For 
these®  reasons  Caesar  decided  that  he  ought  to  cross  the 
river  immediately.^"     He  thought  it  of  great  importance  to 


112  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

himself  and  the  state  that  even  the  farthest  German  tribes 
should  fear  for  their  own'^  fortunes. 

I.  Anii .  .  .  tii't,  Deque.  2.  Latin,  "it  had  been  persuaded  to  them," 
followed  by  indir.  disc.  3.  Subjv.  Why?  4.  etiam.  5.  ipse.  6.  Gen. 
7.  Le.  on  the  authority  of  the  Ubii.  Cf.  sec.  176.  8.  sibi,  as  indirect 
reflexive.  9.  Use  relative  for  demonstrative.  10.  statim.  11.  Appo- 
sitional  gen.  of  ipse. 

LESSON  XCVII 

436.  The  Dative  of  the  Indirect  Object  with  Compounds.  —  §  370.  a  ;  37 1 
(228) ;  B.  1S7.  Ill ;  G.  347  ;  H.  429  (386) ;  H-B.  376. 

437.  The  Dative  with  Verbs  of  Taking  Away.  — §  3S1  (229);  B.  188, 
2.  d) ;  G.  347.  S  ;   "-  427  (3'S5.  II.  2) ;   ll-l!.  371. 

438.  Many  verbs  compounded  with  ad,  ante,  con,  etc.,  do  not 
take  the  dative.  Their  doing  so  depends  upon  their  capacity  for 
governing  an  indirect  object  (cf.  sec.  424).  The  usage  of  the  best 
writers  as  recorded  in  the  lexicon  is  the  only  safe  guide.  Transi- 
tive compounds  take  the  accusative  (direct  object)  along  with  the 
dative  (indirect  object),  as  —  Caesar  Gallis  bellum  infert. 

439.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

proelio  interesse.  to  take  part  in  a  battle. 

quo  .  .  .  eo.  the  .  .  .  the  (followed  by  a  com- 

parative). 

For  Oral  Translation — Book  IV.   17 

440.  I.  Part  of  the  cavalry  did  not  take  part  in  the  bat- 
tle. 2.  It  was  not  consistent  with  Caesar's  dignity  to  cross 
the  Rhine  with  boats,  3.  He  thought  that  he  ought  to 
build  a  bridge.  4.  This  was  not  easy  to  do,  for  reasons 
which  I  shall  mention.  5.  The  river  was  of  great  width, 
swiftness,  and  depth.  6.  No  one  can  ^take  from  Caesar 
the  fame^  of  building  this  bridge.  7.  The  beams  were  so 
ioined  together  that  they  could  withstand  the  violence  of 


SYNTAX   OF   NOUNS  113 

the  stream.  8.  The  Romans  deprived^  many  thousand* 
Gauls  and  Germans  of  life.  9.  The  barbarians  wished  to 
injure  the  bridge.  10.  To  whom  did  Caesar  assign^  the 
building  of  the  bridge.'*  11.  He  placed^  his  legati  over® 
the  work.  12.  The  longer  the  bridge  was,  the  more  difficult 
it  was  to  defend. 

I.  eripere  with  ace.  and  dat.  of  separation.  2.  gloria.  3.  auferre. 
4.  Dat.  of  separation  followed  by  the  part.  gen.  5.  tradere.  Cf.  sec. 
336.     6.  praeficere. 

LESSON   XCVIII 

441.  The  Dative  of  Possession.  —  §  yj-^  (-3') ;  B.  190;  G.  349;  H.  430 
(387) ;  H-B.  374. 

442.  The  Dative  of  Purpose  or  End. —  §  382  (233) ;  B.  191  ;  G.  356; 
H.  433  (390) ;  H-B.  360,  361. 

443.  Both  the  dative  with  esse  and  habere  with  the  accusa- 
tive are  freely  used  to  express  possession  with  little  distinction  in 
meaning :  — 

™,        ,,-      ,  ,  f militi  est  equus. 

1  he  soldier  has  a  horse  \ 

l^  miles  equum  habet. 

In  expressions  of  naming  the  dative  with  esse  is  more  common. 

444.  IDIOMS   AND  PHRASES 

pons  in  Rheno.  a  bridge  over  the  Rhine. 

alicui  metum  inicere.  to  inspire  fear  in  sovie  one. 

unum  in  locum  convenire.  to  assemble  in  one  place. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.  18,  19 

445.  I,  The  Germans  had  no  bridge  over^  the  Rhine. 
2.  All  the  work  was  done  within  ten  days.  3.  Caisar  has- 
tened into  the  territory  of  a  tribe  whose ^  name  was  the 
Sugambri.  4.  The  bridge  was  ^a  great  terror  to  the  barba- 
rians.    5..  While  Caesar  was  delaying  a  few  days  across  the 


114  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

Rhine  ambassadors  came  Uo  beg  for  peace.  6.  'He  com- 
mandetl  liostages  to  be  brought  to  him.  7.  The  Sugambri 
hid  themselves  in  the  woods  from  the  time  that  the  bridge 
began  to  be  untlertaken.  8.  He  burned  all  the  buildings 
that  they  had.  9.  The  Romans  inspired  fear  in  the  Ger- 
mans.     10.  Let  all  that  can  bear  arms  meet  in  one  place. 

11.  Cassar  had  many  reasons  for  leading  his  army  across. 

12.  He  returned  to  Gaul  eighteen  days  after  he  had  crossed. 

13.  The  friendship  of  Ccesar  was  ^of  the  greatest  service  to 
the  Ubii. 

I.  in  with  the  abl.  2.  Gen.  or  dat.  3.  Latin,  "for  a  great  terror." 
4.  Could  this  be  expressed  by  the  infin.  (cf.  sec.  122)?  By  the  supine 
(cf.  sec.  353)?     5.  E.Ypress  in  two  ways.     6.  Dat.  of  purpose. 

LESSON   XCIX 

446.  The  Dative  of  Reference.  — §376(235);  B.  1S8;  G.  352  ;  11.  425. 
I,  2,  4  (384.  n.  I.  I),  2) ;  4) ;   H-B.  366,  369. 

447.  The  Dative  with  Adjectives.  —  §  383,  384(234);  B.  192;  G.  359; 
IL  434  (390;   H-B.  362.  I-I II;  339.^. 

448.  In  Cnssar  the  adjectives  most  common  with  the  dative  are 
proximus,  finitimus,  and  idoneus. 

449.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

longe  abesse.  to  be  far  away. 

magno  Caesarl  iisul  esse.  to  be  of  great  service  to  Ccesar. 

maior  navium  multitiido.  a  somewhat  large  number  of 

ships. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.  20 

450.  I.  The  Gauls  have  early  winters.  2.  'As  you  set 
out  from  Gaul,  Britain  is  not  far  away.  3.  The  time  of  the 
year  was  not  suitable^  for  carrying  on  war.     4.  "Aid  from 


SYNTAX   OF   NOUNS 


"5 


Britain  was  furnished  to  our  enemies.  5.  It  will  be  of  great 
service  to  Caesar  if  he  only  visits^  the  island.  6.  Strange* 
to  say/  the  harbors  of  the  island  were  unknown  to  the 
Gauls.  7.  The  traders  are  the  ®only  ones  that  know  any- 
thing about  Britain.  8.  There  is  danger  for  one  going  there 
rashly.  9.  I  cannot  find  out  how  large  the  island  is.  10.  ''Are 
the  harbors  adapted  ^to  a  somewhat  large  number  of  ships 
or  not?  II.  The  tribes  which  inhabit  Britain  are  similar  to 
the  Gauls.     12.  The  coast  of  the  island  is  ^near  to  Gaul. 

I.  Latin,  "  to  those  setting  out."  2.  aptus,  -a,  -um.  3.  Fut.  perf. 
Cf.  sec.  71.  4.  mirabilis,  -e.  5.  Supine.  6.  unus,  -a,  -um.  Cf.  sec. 
145.  7.  Cf.  sec.  213.  8.  Use  the  dat.  and  observe  that  the  text  has  the 
ace.  with  ad.     9.  finitimus,  -a,  -um. 


LESSON  C 

451.  Review  the  Rules  of  Syntax,  Lessons  Lxxxix-xcix. 

452.  Review  the  following  idioms  and  phrases  :  — 

mille  passus. 


alicui  metum  inicere. 

aliquem  alicuius  in  vestigio  pae- 

nitere. 
aliquot  diebus  ante, 
apud  Caesarem  remanere. 
aquationis  causa, 
auxilium  ferre. 
contra  atque. 
domi  militiaeque. 
fuga  desperata. 
longe  abesse. 

magni  hostium  interest  (refert). 
magni  mea  interest  (refert). 
magno  Caesari  usui  esse, 
magnopere  orare. 
maior  navium  multitudd. 


multa  milia  passuum. 
nihil  spati. 
non  iam. 

omnibus  persuadetur. 
peritus  rei  militaris. 
persuadet  omnibus, 
pons  in  Rheno. 
post  diem  tertium. 
potestatem  facere. 
proelio  interesse. 
quo  ...  60. 
resistere  alicui. 
terra  marique. 
ut  erat  constitutum. 


Il6  LATIN    COMl'OSITION 

FtiR  Written  Translation  —  Book  IV.  21 

453.  Hefore  Cccsar  set  out  for  Britain  he  sent  ahead  two 
men,  Volusenus  and  Commius,  who,  he  thought,  would  be 
suitable  for  this  business.^  The  one  did  not  trust  himself 
ti)  the  barbarians,  but"  came  back  in  five  days  and  reported 
what  he  had  seen.  The  other,  (who  was)  faithful  to  him,  a 
man^  of  great  ■•  valor,  and  (one)  whose  influence  in  these  ) 
regions  was  considered  of  great  consequence,  he  ordered 
to  visit  what  states  he  could,  and  to  announce  that  he 
himself  would  come  there  as  soon  as  possible,  and  further 
to  urge  that  they  submit  to  the  supremacy  of  the  Roman 
people.  Meanwhile  he  had  set  out  for  (the  country  of)  the 
Morini,  for  from  there  the  passage  is  the  shortest  for  those ^ 
desiring  to  go  to  the  island. 

I.  negotium.  2.  Latin,  "and."  Cf.sec.245,note  3.  3.  Omit.  4.  Latin, 
"  the  highest."  Superlatives  are  much  more  common  in  Latin  than  in 
English. 

LESSON  CI 

The  Accusative  Case 

454.  The  Direct  Object. —  §  387.  (7,3(237);  B.  172  ff. ;  G.  330;  H.  404 
(371);  H-B.  390.  d. 

455.  The  Cognate  Accusative.  —  §  390.  a,  c,  ^  (238) ;  B.  176;  G.  332, 
333;  H.  409  (371.  II);  H-B.  396.  I,  2. 

456.  The  Accusative  of  Extent. —  §  425.  a,b  (257) ;  B.  181  ;  G.  335; 
II.  417  (379);   H-B.  387.  L 

457.  Many  intransitive  verbs  become  transitive  when  com- 
pounded with  circum,  per,  praeter,  or  trans. 

458.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

imperitus    Romanae    consuetudi-      unacquaitited  with  Roman  cus- 
nis.  totns. 


SYNTAX   OF   NOUNS  iiy 

satis  opportune  accidere.  /^  happen  very  opportunely. 

in  fidem  accipere.  to  receive  tinder  {one'' s') protection. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.  22 

459.  I.  The  Morini  were  distant  about  ten  miles  from  the 
place  where  ^  Caesar  was  equipping  his  ships.  2.  They 
were  unacquainted  with  Roman  customs  and  Uved  a  bar- 
barous life.  3.  For  this  reason  they  ^made  many  mistakes. 
4.  They  sent  ambassadors  to  Cssar  to  promise  ^many 
things.  5.  This  happened  very  opportunely  for  Caesar. 
6.  On  account  of  the  time  of  year  I  will  count  nothing  of 
more  importance  than  Britain,  7.  I  will  demand  a  great 
number  of  hostages  *from  them.  8.  I  advise  them  this,^ 
^that  they  bring  the  hostages  quickly  and  be  received  under 
my  protection.  9.  Caesar^  had  about  eighty  transports  for 
carrying  over  two  legions.  10.  I  think  that  the  transports 
were  about  eighty  feet  long  and  twenty  feet  wide.  11.  To 
whom  did  Caesar  give  the  rest  of  the  army  to  lead  ?  To 
certain  legati.  12.  Ships  are  often  kept  by  the  wind  from 
coming  into  port  for  many  hours. 

X.  ubi.  2.  peccare  with  cognate  ace.  3.  Cognate  ace.  4.  Latin,  "  to 
them."     5.  Appositive  clause  of  result.     6.  Dat.  of  poss. 

LESSON  CII 

460.  Two  Accusatives,  Direct  Object  and  Predicate  Accusative.  —  §  391. 
392,  393- «  (239- «);  B.  177;  G.  340;  H.  410  (373);  H-B.  392. 

461.  Two  Accusatives,  Person  and  Thing.  — ^  §  394,  395.  N.  3 ;  396.  a  (239. 
^.2.^r.  N.  i,R.);  B.178;  G.339;  H. 41 1-413(374-376);  H-B.393.a,^. 

462.  Note  that  peto,  postulo,  and  quaero  do  not  take  two  accusa- 
tives, but  the  accusative  of  the  thing  and  the  ablative  with  ab 
(rarely  ex)  of  the  person  :  — 

auxilium  a  Caesare  petere,  to  ask  aid  front  Casar. 
frumentum  ab  sociis  postulare,  to  demand  corn  from  the  allies. 


ii8  LATIN   COMPOSITION 

463.  IDIOMS   AND  PHRASES 
navls  cSnscendere.  to  embark. 

tertia  fere  vigilia  solvere.  to  cast  off  about  midnight. 

hora  diei  circiter  quarta.  about  ten  o'clock. 

in  ancoris  exspectare.  to  lie  at  anchor. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.  23 

464.  I.  Ccesar  demanded  a  great  many  hostages  from  the 
Menapii.  2.  The  Menapii  were  asked  for  a  great  number 
of  hostages  by  Caesar.  3.  The  island  nearest  to  Gaul  was 
called^  Britain.  4.  Caisar  embarked  and  cast  off  about 
midnight.  5.  He  reached  the  island  about  ten  o'clock. 
6.  Then  he  lay  at  anchor  five  hours  until  the  rest  of  the 
ships  should  arrive  there.  7.  This  place  is  not  at  all  suit- 
able for  landing  troops,  because  the  sea  is  closely  hemmed 
in  by  mountains.  8.  The  legati  asked*  Ca;sar  what  he  had 
learned  from  Volusenus.  9.  He  did  not  conceal'  from  them 
what  he  wished  done.  10.  Both  wind  and  tide  were  favor- 
able. II.  The  Romans  were  not  very  skillful*  in  maritime 
affairs.  12.  Who  taught  Caesar  navigation?  I  do  not  know. 
13.  The  Britons  did  not  beg  Csesar  for  peace. 

I.  appellare.  2.  rogare.  3.  celare.  Observe  that  in  this  sentence 
as  in  the  preceding  the  ace.  of  the  thing  is  expressed  by  the  indirect 
question.     4.  peritus,  -a,  -um. 

LESSON  cni 

465.  The  Adverbial  Accusative.  —  §  397.  a  (240.  a,  b) ;  B.  176.  3 ;  185  ; 
G.  z:,z ;  II.  416.  2  (37S.  2)  ;   II-B.  388,  389. 

466.  Accusative  as  Subject  of  an  Infinitive.  —  §  397.  e  (2\o.f)  \  B.  184  ; 
G.  343.  2  ;  H.  415.  610,  612  {536) :  H-B.  398. 

467.  By  far  the  most  common  form  of  the  adverbial  accusative 
in  Cassar  is  the  adverbial  use  of  neuter  pronouns,  or  of  neuter 


SYNTAX  OF   NOUNS  1 19 

adjectives  indefinite  in  meaning.  They  are  sometimes  classed  as 
cognate  accusatives,  sometimes  as  pure  adverbs ;  but  the  line 
cannot  be  sharply  drawn.  Examples  are  multum,  plus,  plurimum, 
paulum,  nihil,  quod.  These  and  similar  words  occur  in  Cassar 
more  than  fifty  times. 

468.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  was  regarded  originally  as 
the  object  of  the  verb  on  which  the  infinitive  depended.  Thus 
iubeo  te  vincere  is  literally,  /  conwtand you  for  conquering.  Later, 
the  accusative  came  to  be  used  as  the  subject  of  the  infinitive 
independently  of  any  governing  verb,  as,  militem.  timere  est  turpe, 
for  a  soldier  to  fear  is  disgraceful. 

469.  IDIOMS   AND  PHRASES 

in  alto  constitui.  to  be  ancJiored  in  deep  water. 

ex  arido.  from  dry  land. 

maximam  partem.  for  the  tnost  part. 

naves  longae.  men-of-war. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.  24,  25 

470.  I.  These  barbarians  are  generally  in  the  habit  of 
using  chariots  in  battle.  2.  The  Romans^  had  the  great- 
est difficulty  in  disembarking.^  3.  Why  did  not  the  ships 
approach  nearer  the  land  ?  4.  Because,  on  account  of  their 
size,  they  could  be  anchored  only  in  deep  water.  5.  We 
had  to  jump  from  the  ships  and  stand  in  the  waves,  and  were 
greatly  hindered  ^in  other  respects.  6.  The  enemy  hurled 
their  weapons  from  dry  land  or  advancing  a  little  into  the 
water.  7.  For  these  reasons  we  *for  the  most  part  did  not 
strive  with  the  same  zeal.  8.  Caesar  says  that  the  men-of- 
war  were  of  great  service  to  the  Romans.  9.  ^ While  his 
men  were  hesitating,  he  ordered  the  men-of-war  to  be  an- 
chored on  the  exposed  flank  of  the  enemy.  10.  He  thought 
that  the  enemy  would  be  terrified  and  retreat.     11.  He  cried 


IJO  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

in  .1  loud  voice  th;\t   lliey  "should  leap  down,  milcss  they 
were  wiUmg  to  betray  the  eagle  to  the  enemy. 

I.  Dat.  of  poss.  2.  Gen.  of  geruiul.  3.  cetera,  adverbial  ace.  4.  Ad- 
verbial ace.  5.  Abl.  abs.  6.  Remember  that  an  imperative  of  direct 
disc,  becomes  subjv.  in  indir. 

LESSON    CIV 

471.  IDIOMS   AND  PHRASES 

signa  subsequi.  to  follow  the  standards. 

alius  alia  ex  navi.  men  from  different  ships. 

ab  latere  aperto.  on  the  exposed  flank. 

proelium  facere.  to  fight  a  battle. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  IV.  26,  27 

472.  When  Caesar  noticed  that  his  soldiers  could  not 
follow  the  standards  and  that  men  from  different  ships 
joined  whatever  standard  they  happened  upon  and  that  the 
enemy  were  hurling  weapons  on  the  exposed  flank,  he  com- 
manded aid  to  be  sent  to  those  that  were  hard  pressed. 
But  as  soon  as  the  Romans  stood  on  dry  land,  they  put  the 
enemy  to  flight  ;  and  the  only  thing  that  was  lacking  to 
Caesar's  former  good  fortune  was  this,  ^that  he^  had  no 
cavalry  ''with  which  to  pursue  the  enemy.  After  this  battle 
was  fought  ambassadors  came  to  ask^  Coesar  for  peace,  and 
said  that  ^he  ought  to  pardon  them  because  they  had  made 
war  upon  him  through  ignorance.  Caesar  demanded  hos- 
tages, all  of  whom"  they  gave  in  a  few  days. 

I.  Substantive  clause  with  quod.  Cf.  sec.  208.  2.  Dat.  of  poss. 
3.  Rel.  clause  of  purpose.  4.  Remember  that  pet5  does  not  take  two 
accusatives.  5.  Latin,  "  it  ought  to  be  pardoned  to  them."  6.  Not 
part.  gen.     Why  ? 


SYNTAX   OF   NOUNS  121 

LESSON    CV 
The  Ablative  Case 

473.  General  Consideration.  —  §  399  (-42) ;  B.  213;  G.  3S4 ;  H.  459 
(411);  H-B.  403. 

474.  The  Ablative  of  Separation.  —  §400,  401,  402  (243);  B.  214; 
G.  390  ;   H.  461-466  (414)  ;   H-B.  408.  I,  2,  3  ;  410,  411,  412. 

475.  The  Ablative  of  Source,  Origin,  and  Material. —  §  403.  a  (244); 
B.  215;  G.  395,  396;  H.  467-470  (415);  H-B.  413,  406.  4. 

476.  The  Ablative  of  Cause. —  §  404  (245) ;  B.  219;  G.  408;  H.  475 
(416) ;  H-B.  444.  c. 

477.  The  ablative  of  separation  regularly  takes  a  preposition 
if  the  ablative  denotes  persons. 

478.  IDIOMS   AND  PHRASES 

in  altum  provehi.  to  put  out  to  sea. 

adversa  nocte.  in  spite  of  the  darkness. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.  28,  29 

479.  I.  The  ships  of  the  cavalry  set  sail  from  the  upper 
harbor  by  Caesar's  ordcr.^  2.  They  trusted  to  the  smooth^ 
sea*  and  gentle  breeze.^  3.  When  they  were  already  seen 
from  the  camp,  a  storm  *kept  them  from  the  land.  4.  The 
wind  carried  some  back  to  the  same  place  from  which  they 
had  set  out.  5.  Others,  after  throwing  out  the  anchors  ^in 
vain,  of  necessity  put  out  to  sea  again,"  in  spite  of  the  dark- 
ness. 6.  'The  Mediterranean  sea  ^ is  without  tides.  7.  For 
this  reason  it  happened  that  the  Romans  did  not  know  that 
the  ocean  tides  are  highest  at  full  moon.  8.  Cassar  was  de- 
prived at  one  time  both  of  his  men-of-war  and  of  (his)  trans- 
ports. 9.  There  is  no  doubt  that  the  enemy  rejoiced®  at  this 
occurrence.  10.  Because  of  this  calamity"  there  was  great 
excitement  throughout  the  whole  army.      11.  Cffisar  was  born 


122  LATIN    COMPOSITION 

of  a  m)blc  family."      12.  Commius  sprang  from  the  Atreba- 
tian  tribe.      13.    The  ships  of  the  Veneti  were  made  of  oak.*'^ 

I.  iussu.  2.  tranquillus,  -a,  -um.  3.  Abl.  of  cause  or  dat.  after  con- 
fidS.  4.  prohibere.  5.  frustra.  6.  rursus.  7.  Mare  laternum.  8.  carere. 
9.  laetlLri.     10.   Latin,  "thing."     11.  genus.     12.  robur. 

LESSON   CVI 

480.  The  Ablative  of  Agent.  — §  405.  N.  i,  n.  2  (246) ;  B.  216  ;  G.  401 ; 
11.  467,  46.S  (415.  I) ;   II-U.  406.  I.  b. 

481.  The  Ablative  of  Comparison.  —  §  406,  407.  a,  c  (247) ;  B.  217  ;  G. 
39S;   n.  471  (417);   II-B.  416.  d. 

482.  The  Ablative  of  Manner.  —  §  \\2.  a,  b  (24S) ;  B.  220;  G.  399; 
H.  473-  3  (419-  ni);  II-B.  445.  1-3;  422. 

483.  Di-stinguish  carefully  between  the  ablative  of  agent  which 
requires  a  preposition  a  or  ab  and  the  ablative  of  means  which  is 
expressed  without  a  preposition  :  — 

a.  The  Gauls  were  overcome  by  the  I^of/tans,  Galli  a  R5manis 
superabantur. 

b.  The  Gauls  were  07'ercome  by  the  valor  of  the  Romans,  Galli 
virtQte  Romanorum  superabantur. 

484.  Note  that  after  pliis,  minus,  amplius,  and  longius,  the  omis- 
sion of  quam  often  has  no  efTect  upon  the  construction. 

485.  The  ablative  of  manner  without  either  cum  or  an  attribu- 
tive adjective  is  rare  and  limited  to  a  few  words  that  have  almost 
the  force  of  adverbs.  In  Ca;sar  we  find  the  following :  animo, 
mente,  iniuria,  silentio. 

486.  IDIOMS   AND  PHRASES 
navis  reficere.  to  repair  ships. 
optimum  factii.                                    the  best  thing  to  do. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.  30,  31 

487.  I.  To  the  chiefs  of  Britain  liberty  was  dearer^  than 
Hfe.     2.   Because  of  the  tempest  both  horsemen,  ships,  and 


SYNTAX   OF   NOUNS  123 

grain  were  lacking  to  the  Romans.  3.  This  camp  was 
smaller  than  usual. ^  4.  They  judged  that  the  best  thing  to 
do  was  to  keep  us  from  grain  and  other  supplies.  5.  If  the 
Romans  had  been  conquered  by  them,  no  one  thereafter 
would  have  crossed  over  to  Britain  to  make  war.  6.  Casar 
began  to  suspect  their  plans  from  the  fact  that  they  had 
ceased  to  give  hostages.  7.  He  therefore  began  to  prepare 
his  resources  for  every  emergency  with  the  greatest  speed. ^ 
8.  How*  did  the  Romans  repair  their  ships  .^  9.  They  used 
the  timber  and  bronze  of  those  ^that  were  in  the  worst  con- 
dition. 10.  Bronze  is  better^  for  ships  than  iron.  11.  Every- 
thing was  done  by  the  soldiers  with  the  greatest  zeal. 

I.  carus,  -a,  -um.  2.  solitum,  -i.  3.  celeritas.  4.  qu5  modo,  abl.  of 
manner  which  has  passed  into  the  adverb  quomodo.  5.  Follow  the  text. 
6.  utilis. 

LESSON   CVII 

488.  The  Ablative  of  Means.  — §  408,  409  (248.  S) ;  B.  218;  G.  401 ; 
H.  476  (420) ;  H-B.  423.  a. 

489.  The  Ablative  with  tlior,fruor,  etc.  —  §  410.  N.  (2.49)  ;  B.  218.  i ; 
G.  407  ;  H.  477  (421.  I);  H-B.  429. 

490.  The  Ablative  with  opus  and  ilsiis.  —  §  411  (243.^);  B.  218.  2; 
G.  406;  H.  477.  Ill  (414.  IV);  H-B.  430.  i. 

491.  Means  is  expressed  in  English  by  ivith  or  by. 
In  Latin  no  preposition  should  be  used. 

492.  '       IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

opus  est  mihi  aliqua  re.  /  need  soviething. 

ab  hostibus  premi.  to  be  hard  pressed  by  the  enemy. 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.  32 

493.  I.  *  Caesar  needed  both  ships  and  cavalry.  2.  While 
he  was  carrying  on  war  in  Britain,  he  did  not  enjoy  much 


1^4  LATIN   COMPOSITION 

quiet. *  3.  'At  that  time  part  of  the  soldiers  were  on  guard 
before  the  gates  of  the  camp.  4.  A  tenth  part  of  a  legion 
is  called  a  cohort.  5.  There  was  need  of  a  guard*  lest  the 
enemy  ^get  possession  of  the  camp.  6.  Cajsar  suspected 
from  the  dust  that  the  legion  which  he  had  sent  to  gather 
grain  was  being  hard  pressed  by  the  enemy.  7.  He  used 
the  cohorts  which  were  on  guard  "to  set  out  with  him.  8.  He 
noticed  that  the  legion  was  being  hard  pressed  on  every  side 
by  the  weapons  of  the  enemy.  9.  They  laid  aside  their 
arms  while  they  were  engaged  in  reaping.  10.  They  hid 
in  the  woods  by  night  that  they  might  attack  the  Romans 
suddenly.  11.  The  Romans  were  no  braver  than  the  Brit- 
ons, but  used  better  weapons. 

I.  Latin,  "  there  was  need  to  Caesar."  2.  otium.  3.  id  temporis,  adv. 
ace.  with  ])art.  gen.  4.  praesidium.  5.  potior  with  either  the  gen.  or  the 
abl.     6.  ad  with  gerund. 

LESSON  cvni 

494.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

in  perpetuum.  for  ever. 

in  omnis  partis.  in  all  directions. 

For  Written  Translation  —  Book  IV.  2)3^  34 

495.  The  barbarians,  thinking  the  opportunity  very  favor- 
able both  for  taking  booty  and  for  freeing  themselves  for 
ever  from  fear  of  the  Romans,  sent  messengers  in  all 
directions  to  collect  infantry  and  cavalry  and  war-chariots. 
They  trusted'  most  of  all  in  the  chariots,  which,  because  of 
their  strangeness,  were  more  terrible^  to  the  Romans  than 
either  horsemen  or  infantry,  and  generally  threw  the  ranks 
into  confusion  by  the  very  rattle  of  their  wheels.  The  char- 
ioteers used  them  with  the  greatest  skill,'^  and  ran  along  the 
pole  and  stood  on  the  yoke  *  while  the  horses  were  going  at 


SYNTAX   OF   NOUNS  125 

full  speed.  ® Whenever  in  battle  they  dismounted  from  the 
chariots,  they  so  stationed  them  that  if  there  ^should  be 
need  of  retreat,  they  could  return  to  them  very  quickly. 

I.  cdnfido  with  abl.  of  cause  or  with  the  dat.  2.  horribilis,  -e.  3.  scien- 
tia.  4.  Abl.  abs.  5.  Past  general  condition,  cf.  sec.  240.  6.  Imperf. 
subjv.     Why.^ 

LESSON    CIX 

496.  The  Ablative  of  Accompaniment.  —  §  413.  a,  b  (248.  7);  B.  222; 
G.  392  ;  H.  473.  I  ;  474  (419.  I.  i) ;  H-B.  418,  419,  420. 

497.  The  Ablative  of  Degree  of  Difference.  —  §  414  (250) ;  B.  223  ;  G. 
403;  H.  479  (423);   H-B.  424. 

498.  The  Ablative  of  Quality  or  Characteristic.  —  §  415.  a  (251);  B. 
224;  G.  400;  H.  473.  2  (419.  II);  H-B.  443. 

499.  The  English  preposition  with  needs  special  care  in  trans- 
lation ;  it  may  denote  — 

a.  Cause,  as  in  he  shook  luiih  fear  (abl.  of  cause  or  the  ace. 
with  propter  or  ob,  sec.  476). 

b.  Means,  as  in  he  sleiu  him  with  a  sword  (abl.  of  means, 
sec.  488). 

c.  Manner,  as  in  ]ie  ran  with  great  speed  (abl.  of  manner, 
sec.  482). 

d.  Accompaniment,  as  in  he  goes  with  three  legions  (abl.  of 
accompaniment,  regularly  with  cum). 

500.  Caesar  uses  the  genitive  to  express  quality  more  than  twice 
as  often  as  the  ablative,  and  observes  the  following  distinctions  :  — 

a.  Numerical  statements  of  measure,  number,  time,  and  space 
are  in  the  genitive. 

b.  Parts  of  the  body  are  in  the  ablative. 

c.  Characteristics  not  included  in  a  or  b  may  be  expressed  by 
either  case. 

501.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

maior  dimidi5.  larger  by  half. 

paucis  post  h5ris.  a  few  hours  later. 

tempesta?  navigation!  idonea.  weather  suitable  for  sailing. 


126  LATIN   COMPOSITION 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.  35,  ;^6 

502.  I.  Cncsar  set  out  for  Britain  with  two  legions.  2.  The 
barbarians'  army  was  larger  by  half.  3.  If  we  should  defeat 
the  enemy,  they  would  escape  peril  by  their  swiftness.  4.  Com- 
mius  was  a  leader  of  great  authority'  among  the  Atrebates. 

5.  Though  the  ships  with  the  cavalry  had  not  yet  arrived, 
yet  Commius  had  brought  over  some  horsemen  with  him. 

6.  The  longer  the  enemy  sustained  the  attack,  the  more  were 
killed.  7.  The  buildings  which  were  burned  were  not  of  great 
size.'-  8.  A  few  hours  later  on  the  same  day,  ambassadors 
were  sent  by  the  enemy  regarding  peace.  9.  Coisar  feared 
that  he  would  not  reach  the  continent  if  he  set  sail  with  weak 
ships.  10.  At  the  time  of  the  equinox  the  weather  is  not 
often  suitable  for  sailing. 

I.  dlgnitas.     2.  magnitudo. 

LESSON   CX 

503.  Ablative  of  Price.  —  §416,  417.  d,  c  (252);  B.  225;  G.  404; 
H.  478  (422);  II-B.  427.  I,  2.  R. 

504.  Ablative  of  Specification. —  §418.  a  (253);  B.  226;  G.  397; 
H.  480  (424);  H-B.  441. 

505.  Ablative  with  dignus  and  indignus.  —  §418.  b  (245.  a.  i) ; 
B.  226.  2;  G.  397.  2;  H.  481  (421.  Ill);  H-B.  442. 

506.  While  price  is  regularly  denoted  by  the  ablative,  it  should 
be  remembered  that  the  four  genitives  tanti,  quanti,  pluris,  and 
minoris  are  used  with  verbs  of  buying  and  selling  to  denote 
indefinite  price. 

507.  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES 

arma  p5nere.  to  lay  down  arms. 

magno  constare.  to  cost  a  great  price. 


SYNTAX   OF   NOUNS  12/ 

For  Oral  Translation  —  Book  IV.  37,  38 

508.  I.  Many  of  Caesar's  victories  cost  a  great  price. 
2.  But  usually  his  care  for^  the  lives ^  of  his  soldiers  was 
worthy  of  the  highest  praise.  3.  The  Romans  did  not  sur- 
pass^ the  Gauls  in  valor  but  in  fortune.  4.  If  you  don't 
want  to  be  killed,  lay  down  your  arms.  5.  Caesar  thought 
that  the  Morini  were  subdued,  but  they  showed  themselves 
unworthy  of  his  friendship.  6.  He  commanded  all  the  cavalry 
to  be  sent  from  the  camp  for  aid  to  his  men.  7.  Though 
they  fought  very  bravely  for  more  than  four  hours,  only  a 
few  had  received  wounds.  8.  For  how  much  did  Caesar 
sell*  the  captives  that  came  into  his  power.''  For  a  very 
great  price.  9.  Labienus  used  the  legions  which  had  been 
brought  back  from  Britain  against  the  Morini.  10.  No  one 
was  more  distinguished^  in  war  than  Caesar.  11.  He  sur- 
passed^ all  other  generals  in  number  of  thanksgivings. 

I.  de  with  the  abl.  2.  Singular  in  Latin.  3.  praestare  with  the 
dative.     4.  vendere.     5.  claius,  -a,  -um. 


INDEX   OF   GRAMMATICAL  NOTES 


Ablative.  Absolute,  when  not 
permissible,  328 ;  agency  distin- 
guished from  means,  483  ;  man- 
ner without  cum  or  modifying 
adjective,  485 ;  means,  491  ; 
quality,  500;  separation,  477. 

Adjective  agreement  with  two 
nouns  of  different  genders,  34. 

Adverbial  accusative,  467. 

Agency  distinguished  from  means, 

483. 

antequam  and  priusquam,  con- 
structions after,  197. 

Appositive,  position  of,  27. 

Appositive  with  a  locative,  29. 

Attraction,  subjv.  of,  293. 

Causal  clauses,  summary  of,  176. 
cum    causal,     180;     constructions 

with,    248 ;    meaning   wkeftever, 

193 ;  temporal,  192. 
Characteristic,  relative  clauses  of, 

144,  145. 
Clauses,  arrangement  of,  17,  23. 
Complementary  infinitive,  315. 
Concessive   clauses,  force  of   the 

concessive  particles,  247. 
Conditional  clauses  of  comparison 

vnth   ac   si,    ut   si,    etc.,   tenses 

employed,  243. 
Conditions,  general,  240. 
Conditions  in  indirect  discourse, 

273-275.  282,  283,  289. 


Conditions,  particular,  227-229. 
Conor,  constructions  after,  131. 

Dative.  With  adjectives,  448 ; 
with  compounds,  438 ;  posses- 
sion, 443 ;  with  special  verbs, 
431 ;  with  verbs,  general  prin- 
ciple, 424. 

Demonstrative  pronouns,  374. 

dignus,  indignus,  constructions 
after,  150. 

dubito,  constructions  after,  167. 

dum,  constructions  after,  255. 

dum,  donee,  quoad,  constructions 
after,  202. 

General  conditions,  240. 

Genitive.  General  rule,  404;  in- 
definite price  expressed  by  tanti, 
quanti,pluris,minoris,5o6;  qual- 
ity, 500;  with  adjectives,  410. 

Gerund  and  gerundive,  difference 
between,  342;  gerundive  of  in- 
transitive verbs,  335  ;  gerundive 
of  purpose,  336. 

Hindering  and  opposing,  verbs  of, 

166. 
Hortatory  subjunctive,  79. 

Imperative  in  prohibitions,  99. 
Imperfect  indicative,  61. 
Indefinite  pronouns,  summary  and 
meaning  of,  369. 


129 


I  ^o 


LATIN   COMrOSITION 


Indirect  Discourse.  Conditions, 
J73-J75,  ;S  J,  2S3,  289  ;  iiifui  inal, 
393 ;  prohibitions,  267 ;  ques- 
tions, 206;  tenses  of  infinitive, 
261,305;  verbs  introducing,  262. 

Indirect  questions,  217-219. 

Infinitive.  Complementary,  verljs 
with,  315;  subject  of,  468; 
tenses  of,  261,  305;  present 
translated  by  English  past,  304  ; 
wth  subject  accusative,  as  ob- 
ject, 310. 

Integral  part,  subjv.  of,  293. 

Interrogatives,  213. 

Intransitive  verbs  made  transitive, 

457- 
ipse  as  indirect  reflexive,  360. 
iubeo,  construction  after,  131. 

Manner,  expressed  by  abl.  without 

cum  or  a  modifying  adj.,  485. 
Means,  ablative  of,  491. 

Optative  subjunctive,  83,  84. 

Participle,  tenses  lacking,  326; 
tenses  of,  325. 

Particular  conditions,  227-229. 

patior,  construction  after,  131. 

Perfect  indicative  with  force  of 
present,  65. 

Perfect  participle  with  force  of 
present,  327. 

Place,  expressions  of,  general 
rule,  394. 

plus,  minus,  amplius,  longius,  con- 
struction after,  484. 

Potential  subjunctive,  94,  95. 

Present  tense,  translation  of,  55  ; 
with  force  of  future,  56. 


Price,     indefinite,     tanti,     quanti, 

pluris,  minoris,  50O. 
Prohibitions, 99;  inindir. disc,  267. 
Pronouns.      Agreement    of,    41  ; 

demonstrative,  374 ;   indefinife, 

369- 
Purpose.  Expressed  by  gerun- 
dive, 336;  supine,  353;  not  by 
infinitive,  122;  relative  clauses 
of,  119,  120;  summary  of  con- 
structions, 137;  verbs  introduc- 
ing substantive  clauses  of,  129, 
130. 

Quality,  genitive  and  ablative,  500. 

Questions.  In  indirect  discourse, 
266;  indirect,  217-219;  rhetori- 
cal, 90. 

qui  causal,  iSi. 

quin,  quominus,  constructions  with, 
166. 

quo  expressing  purpose,  121. 

quod,  substantive  clauses  intro- 
duced by,  208,  209. 

Relative  clauses,  general  statement, 

118. 
Relative  clauses  of  purpose,  119, 

120. 
Relative   pronoun    agreeing   with 

predicate  noun,  42 ;   cannot  be 

omitted,  368. 
Result  clauses,  154,  155- 
Result,  substantive  clauses  of,  162. 
Rhetorical  questions,  90. 

Second  periphrastic   conjugation, 

construction  with,  334. 
Separation,  ablative  of,  477. 
Sequence  of  tenses,  io6,  107. 


INDEX   OF   GRAMMATICAL   NOTES 


I^I 


Subjunctive.  Hortatory,  79;  in 
independent  sentences,  78 ;  in 
wishes  and  prayers  (optative), 
83,  84 ;  of  integral  part  or 
attraction,  293 ;  potential,  94, 
95;  tenses  of,  75;  translated 
by  English  indicative,  77 ;  with 
force  of  English  potential,  76. 

Substantive  clauses,  summary  of, 
161  ;  of  purpose,  129,  130;  of 
result,  162. 

Supine  in  -u,  354;  in  -um,  353. 

Temporal  clauses,  general  state- 
ment, 1S5  ;  summary  of,  184. 

Tenses.  Imperfect,  61 ;  more 
exact  in  Latin,  71  ;  of  infini- 
tive, 261, 305;  of  participle,  325; 
of  subjunctive,  75  ;  perfect,  65  ; 
present,  55,  56 ;  sequence  of,  106, 
107,  111-114. 

that,  meanings  and  Latin  equiva- 
lents, 260 ;  not  rendered  after 
verbs  of  saying,  259. 


to  not  always  a  sign  of  the  dative, 
425. 

Verbs  of  asking  (peto,  postulo, 
quaero),  construction  after,  462. 

Verbs  of  hindering  and  opposing, 
166. 

veto,  construction  after,  131. 

■with,  how  to  be  translated,  499. 

Word-Order.  Adjective,  11;  ap- 
positive,  27;  clauses,  17,  23; 
common  object,  19;  common 
subject,  18  ;  demonstratives,  11  ; 
emphasis,  4,  3,  10;  general  dis- 
tinction between  Latin  and  Eng- 
lish, 2  ;  general  law  of  euphony, 
20 ;  normal  order,  5  ;  numerals, 
1 1  ;  rhetorical  order,  9 ;  sum, 
position  of,  28  ;  words  referring 
back  to  a  previous  sentence,  12. 


THE  LIBRARY 
UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA 

Santa  Barbara 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW. 


.Om-9, '66(0633888)9482 


AA    001  065  201    4 


205  00434  4345 


